{\rtf1\ansi\deff1
{\fonttbl{\f0\froman Times New Roman;}{\f1\fswiss Arial;}{\f2\fnil Symbol;}}
{\colortbl;\red0\green0\blue255;\red0\green0\blue0;}
{\stylesheet{\fs28 \snext0 Normal;}
}\pard\plain
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 {\up K}
\b\fs28 Lotus Suspension Analysis \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  SHARK,  Introduction
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \uldb Lotus\plain\fs20  Suspension provides a simple to use tool for the design and analysis of suspension geometry. Standard suspension types using individual default pre-filled templates provide easy creation of kinematic models in either \uldb 2D\plain\fs20  or \uldb 3D\plain\fs20  modes.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm0.bmp\}
\par Creating a new model using pre-defined template types
\par \pard 
\par 
\par Analysis of suspension geometry in Bump, Rebound, Roll and Steering is performed in an interactive environment. \uldb Graphical\plain\fs20  plots of selected derivatives are continually updated as suspension hard points are modified, either singly or as \uldb groups\plain\fs20 .
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm1.bmp\}
\par Graphical Display of Suspension Model
\par \pard 
\par 
\par The inclusion of \uldb bushes\plain\fs20 , spring properties, \uldb tyre stiffness\plain\fs20  and \uldb external forces\plain\fs20  allow \uldb compliant\plain\fs20  response to be calculated, including automatic creation of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\uldb \f1 compliance coefficients{\up K}
\plain\fs20 \plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  for defined \uldb load sets\plain\fs20 .
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm2.bmp\}
\par Compliant Suspension Coefficients Display
\par \pard 
\par Mass properties and component damping provide modal analysis capability and the prediction of the forced damped response of the system. Individual mode shapes can be viewed animated on the model. The forced response at specific frequencies can be animated together with the complete speed sweep response.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm3.bmp\}
\par Modal Analysis Frequencies \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Bar Chart
\par \pard 
\par Suspension templates can be either corner models or complete axle models. These complete axles may be because they are rigid axle suspension types or because it is required to model the effect of a connecting link such as the rack, sub-frame or an anti-roll bar.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm4.bmp\}
\par Example Full Axle Template \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Anti-Roll Bar
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview - Introduction
\par \pard\li1435\fi-1435 \fs20 
\par \pard \plain\fs20 Shark provides an analysis tool for calculating the suspension \uldb derivatives\plain\fs20  of pre-defined types of kinematic suspensions, through an interactive \uldb graphical\plain\fs20  interface. The program calculates the suspension derivatives, i.e. camber, castor, toe angle, roll centre height, etc., over three articulation types, bump/rebound, roll and steering, (steering 3D module only).
\par 
\par It functions either in \uldb 2D or 3D forms\plain\fs20  with increasing level of data requirements and analysis results with the 3D form. All suspension hard points can be \uldb edited\plain\fs20  or \uldb dragged\plain\fs20  through a fully \uldb dynamic 3D viewing\plain\fs20  environment with \uldb graphical\plain\fs20  results updated as the suspension hard points are modified.
\par \pard 
\par Extensions to the integral solver allow for \uldb bush compliant\plain\fs20  effects and \uldb applied external forces\plain\fs20  to be included to understand the impacts of compliance on the suspension characteristics.
\par 
\par Mass and damping properties also allow for the rigid body modes to calculated and the modal shapes viewed. The application of spring forces and external forces allow the forced/damped response to be predicted and the displacements viewed at user defined frequencies.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm5.bmp\}
\par Example screen shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Overall appearance of application
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview, Modules
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The program has two modules, \uldb 2D\plain\fs20  and 3D. The suspension geometry data used in each module is completely independent of the other module. Switching between modules with the relevant menu or icon will change the display to reflect the model, results and settings of that module.
\par 
\par It is possible to move a 2D model data into one of the default 3D templates via the \i Solve / \uldb Convert 2D to 3D\plain\i\fs20 \plain\fs20  menu option. You currently cannot automatically simplify 3D data down to 2D, this not considered a likely requirement.
\par \pard 
\par Many of the commands and menu options are identical between the 2D and 3D modules. Where a menu or action is not relevant to that module it will be \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 greyed\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  out.
\par 
\par Again where possible the same functionality and behavior is common between the 2D and 3D modules.
\par 
\par The 2D module works in the cross car plane only, i.e. Y-Z plane, where Y is cross car and Z is height.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm6.bmp\}
\par Module Icons in the File toolbar
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  2D Suspension Types
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par In the 2D module there are only two basic suspension \uldb types\plain\fs20 ;
\par 
\par \pard\fi715 \b 1) Double Wishbone
\par 2) Macpherson Strut
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par Because in the 2D module no provision is included for the modeling of springs, dampers or steering mechanisms, the majority of the 3D module\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s templates are covered by the two 2D suspension types.
\par 
\par This does mean that trailing arm type suspensions cannot be modelled in the 2D module.
\par 
\par The 2D module works in the cross car plane only, i.e. Y-Z plane, where Y is cross car and Z is height.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm7.bmp\}
\par Selecting the 2D Suspension Type
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D Suspension Types
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The 3D module has 28 pre-defined suspension types;
\par 
\par \pard\fi715 \b  1) \uldb Double Wishbone, damper to lower wishbone\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20  
\par \b  2) \uldb Lower H frame, single upper link\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \b  3) \uldb Steerable Macpherson Strut\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \b  4) \uldb Non-Steerable Macph Strut, two lower ball joints, tie to ground\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \b  5) \uldb 5-Link Rigid Axle (Panhard Rod)\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \b  6) \uldb Double Wishbone, damper to upper wishbone\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \b  7) \uldb Non/Steerable Macpherson Strut, steering arm to lower wishbone\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \b  8) \uldb 4-Link Rigid Axle (Panhard Rod)\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\fi715 \b  9) \uldb 4-Link Rigid Axle (Twin Upper)\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \b 10) \uldb Trailing Arm with Two Cross Car Links\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \b 11) \uldb Semi/Trailing Arm\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \b 12) \uldb Steerable Twin Parallel Wishbones with Steering Knuckle\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \b 14) \uldb Double Wishbone with Push Rod Suspension\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \b 15) \uldb Double Wishbone, Rocker Arm Damper\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \b 16) \uldb Non/Steerable Lower \plain\f0\b\uldb\fs20 \'91\f1 A\plain\f0\b\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1  Arm with Toe Link\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \b 17) \uldb Double Wishbone, Push Rod, Mono-shock\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\fi715 \b 18) \uldb Double Wishbone, Upper Toe Link, Drop \plain\f0\b\uldb\fs20 \'91\f1 S\plain\f0\b\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1  Link\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \b 19) \uldb Hinged Trailing Arm, Twin lower Link\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \b 20) \uldb Double Wishbone, Twin Outer Ball Joints\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \b 21) \uldb 5-Link Rigid Axle (Watts Linkage)\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \b 22) \uldb Double Wishbone, Twin Outer Ball Joints, Spring Front\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \b 23) \uldb Double Wishbone, Anti-Roll Bar\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \b 24) \uldb Steerable Macpherson Stut, Twin Outer Ball Joints\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \b 25) \uldb Double Wishbone, Twin Lower Outer Ball Joints\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\fi715 \b 26) \uldb Double Wishbone, Damper to Lower Wishbone, Compliant Rack\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \b 27) \uldb Steerable Macpherson Strut, Twin Lower Link\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \b 28) \uldb 4-Link Rear, Transverse Control Link\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \b 29) \uldb Twist Beam \plain\f0\b\uldb\fs20 \'96\f1  Twin Wheel\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20 
\par \pard 
\par Some of these suspension types are steerable and in which case will appear as options for both front and rear suspension selections. Whilst non-steerable suspension types will only appear in the rear suspension list. The majority of these templates are just corner models, some axle templates are included. Users can convert these or their own corner templates to axle templates using the menu item \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1\i Edit / Convert Corner to Axle Model\plain\f0\i\fs20 \'92\plain\fs20 .
\par 
\par For steerable suspension types the steering mechanism type is selected separately from either a rack or steering box.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm8.bmp\}
\par Selecting the 3D Front Suspension Type
\par \pard 
\par It is possible to define your \uldb own 3d templates\plain\fs20 . These can be loaded automatically and either used as additions to the existing hard coded templates, replacements for or modifications of the hard coded ones. Templates that are loaded automatically are referred to as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 default\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  templates. Users can also load additional \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 user\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  defined templates by browsing for an external file. All templates loaded from external files, (i.e. both default and user), are loaded into a certain template index. Thus it is possible to overwrite an existing hard coded template with a default or user template having the same index number. Similarly it is possible to overwrite a default template with a user template. The default templates are stored in a text file named \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 _User_Templates.Dat\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  and is searched for in the programs startup folder. It is scanned for a program start-up and if found it is read and any extra templates loaded.
\par \pard 
\par It is possible to re-run the defaults loading process during a session, (without the need to restart), by using the menu item \i File / Re-Read Default Templates\plain\fs20 .
\par 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D Steering Types
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The 3D front suspension templates are restricted to being \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 steerable\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . A steerable template has an identified point attached to the body that is articulated in a prescribed manner for the Steering \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 mode\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  of analysis.
\par 
\par Two types of steering type are available;
\par 
\par \pard\fi715 \b 1) Steering Rack
\par 2) Steering Box
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The steering rack applies a linear displacement of the nominated track rod end along the Y-axis. No additional data points are required to define the steering rack. The defined steering travel is the linear distance in mm.
\par 
\par The steering box type requires additional geometry points to be added to identify the pitman point and steering arm axis. The defined steering travel for a steering box type is angular rotation of the steering arm.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm9.bmp\}
\par Steering box graphical display \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Box points highlighted
\par \pard 
\par 
\par Note that steering is not considered in the 2D module as it is by definition a 3D phenomena.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm10.bmp\}
\par Selecting the 3D Steering Articulation Type
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Graphical Interface
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The graphical interface consists of a conventional Windows style container window, with a top menu bar and a series of status panels along the bottom.
\par 
\par Optional toolbars are drawn by default to the left of the window, containing short cut icons to some of the main menus. The user can specify the visibility of the toolbars together with their position. Additionally the toolbars can be displayed as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 floating\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  rather than anchored to one of the edges.
\par 
\par Floating toolbars can be re-docked to the required edge through picking and dragging to the new position, (note the outline shape will change to indicate docking).
\par \pard 
\par The initial positions of the toolbars can be set via the \i SetUp / Start Options / ToolBar Position\plain\fs20  menu item, with \i Top, Bottom, Left \plain\fs20 or \i Right\plain\fs20  options available. This change is saved to the users \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 ini\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  file and will be applied next time the application is re-started.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm11.bmp\}
\par Confirming the change in toolbar position
\par \pard 
\par The suspension graphics is drawn in the window titled \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 2D Display\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 3D Display\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  as appropriate for the current module setting. This window cannot be closed, but can be repositioned, re-sized and minimized. Only one graphic window can be opened by the application at a time, (i.e. you cannot open different models at the same time using different graphic windows in the way that a multi-document application like Word would).
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm12.bmp\}
\par Example 2D Graphic window
\par \pard 
\par Results graphs are displayed in individual windows. Each new graph added opening a new window. The graph windows can be moved, re-sized, closed and minimized. The title of the graph window reflects the plotted variable.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm13.bmp\}
\par Example 3D Graph window
\par \pard 
\par By default on start-up only the graphic window and toolbars are drawn, no graphs are displayed until they are added via the \i Graph / New/Open\plain\fs20  menu.
\par 
\par The settings for window positions, sizes and variables can be saved such that when the application is re-started all windows are re-opened in the same positions, see \i SetUp / Save Window Settings\plain\fs20 .
\par 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Hard Point Dragging
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The suspension hard points can be selected from the screen via the mouse and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dragged\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  to a new position, the suspension derivatives being re-calculated as the hard point is moved. The selected derivatives that are being displayed graphically are updated during the hard point screen dragging. Point dragging can be in a 2D view along both viewed axes, a single axis or dragging in a 3D view along a selected axis direction.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm14.bmp\}
\par Graphics Screen \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Dragging mode, tracking lines show Y axis direction.
\par \pard 
\par The majority of the point dragging functionality is performed using a combination of left and right mouse buttons. The mouse buttons are also used extensively for the dynamic viewing option and thus this \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 sharing\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  requires a switch between \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 edit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode.
\par 
\par Point dragging is one part of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Edit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode. The other two parts are direct editing and joggle editing.
\par 
\par To indicate when the application is in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode and when in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Edit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode not only are the relevant menus and icons \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 checked\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  but also \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 corners\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  are added to the graphic display when in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm15.bmp\}
\par Graphics Screen \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Indicating in Dynamic View mode.
\par \pard 
\par To change to editing mode un-select \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic viewing\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  using \i View / Dynamic Viewing / Off\plain\fs20 . Alteratively select the dynamic viewing icon from the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  toolbar.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm16.bmp\}
\par Dynamic Viewing Icon- Shown as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
\par \pard 
\par When in point dragging mode \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tracking lines\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  are drawn to indicate the current \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tracking\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  direction(s). To change the current tracking direction the right mouse button will cycle through the available tracking direction options. A similar action is achieved by selecting the mouse icon from the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  toolbar.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm17.bmp\}
\par Mouse Icon \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Cycles through tracking options.
\par \pard 
\par Selecting any of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Edit icons\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  changes the mode to edit and cancels the dynamic view mode. In a similar way selecting any of the three dynamic view icons changes to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode.
\par 
\par Hard point joggling operates in a similar way to dragging with regard to available directions. The drawn joggle symbol indicates the number of joggle directions available. To use joggle select either Ctrl + Arrow Key for coarse joggle or Shift + Arrow Key for fine joggle. The joggle fine size is a tenth of the coarse size, the coarse size can be set via \i SetUp / Gen Defaults\'85\plain\fs20 
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm18.bmp\}
\par Example Screen shot of point joggle
\par \pard 
\par Point dragging is affected by both Groups and Coincident points. The settings for groups and point coincidence change a single point pick and drag event into a potential single point pick but multiple point drag. In the case of groups, the current groups points are all translated by the same amount. Whilst for point coincidence only the point or points selected from a displayed list are moved, again all selected points are moved by the same amount.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm19.bmp\}
\par Example Coincident point pick
\par \pard 
\par The coincident point selection feature is switched on via the \i Solve / Point Coincidence\plain\fs20  menu. When switched off the nearest point to the picked position is always selected. The tolerance used to decide whether two points are coincident can be changed via the \i SetUp / Gen Defaults\'85\plain\fs20  menu. A similar tolerance exists to control whether a point is within the pick region.
\par 
\par The default/standard method of model change during point dragging is to modify the position of a particular point, (or points for the case of a group), to its new position and hence change its relative position to any other point on the same part that hasn\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t been dragged. This \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 change\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode is referred to as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Change Part Lengths\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . An alternative \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 change\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode has been added that allows the existing part geometry to be retained. In this \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Retain Part Lengths\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode only the hard points attached to the body (i.e. ground) can be selected and dragged, but when dragged all part lengths and hence point relevant positions are retained on each part in the model.
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Groups
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par In the 3D mode the hard points can be formed into groups such that when one of that group is selected via the mouse and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dragged\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , the other points in the group are dragged by the same amount, i.e. maintaining their relative positions within the group. This can be used for example to mimic moving a wishbone or suspension upright.
\par 
\par The only visible change to the graphic display when in group mode is that the number of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 pickable\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  points is reduced to those in the group. Pickable points are drawn in a different colour and size to the non-pickable ones, (this can also be seen normally on static position versus incremental position, where only the static position can be picked). A further indicator as to the active use of a group is when in edit mode the drag lines are only drawn through the current groups\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  points.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm20.bmp\}
\par Group Selected \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Lower Wishbone Points Grouped
\par \pard 
\par The user can define any number of groups, a single point can be a member of any number of groups. Only one group can be current at a time. The group relationship is thus only applied when the group is current and the relationship taken from the point of making the group current.
\par 
\par Group data is saved with the model data file for subsequent re-use. Individual groups can be deleted from the model using \i SetUp / Groups / Delete \plain\fs20 selecting the required group to delete by its label.
\par \pard 
\par Users can create groups using the \i SetUp / Groups / Create...\plain\fs20  menu item. Give the new group a unique label when prompted. A group is associated with either the front or rear suspension, you cannot add points to one group from both ends. Creating a group thus involves identifying how many points and which points are associated with the group.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm21.bmp\}
\par Group Creation \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Selecting the required points for a three point group
\par \pard 
\par The contents of an existing group can be edited through the \i SetUp / Groups / Edit\plain\fs20  menu.
\par 
\par Once a group has been created it has no effect on hard point editing until the group is made current. To make a group current select the required group from the \i SetUp / Groups / Current\plain\fs20  menu.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm22.bmp\}
\par Making a Group Current
\par \pard 
\par To revert back to conventional data editing with all hard points available \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 cancel\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  the group setting using the \i SetUp / Groups / Cancel\plain\fs20  menu item.
\par 
\par A temporary group can be created by the selection of a screen area, the created group will include all points within this selected region. A temporary group created in this way is disabled/cancelled in the same way as a conventional group, but once cancelled is then lost and would need to be re-created if required again. 
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Dynamic Viewing
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The main graphical window has dynamic viewing via the mouse, that allows translation, scaling and rotation (3D module only), of the suspension graphics.
\par 
\par Dynamic viewing shares the functional use of the mouse and its buttons with the hard point data editing, joggling and dragging functions. Thus to enable both dynamic viewing and editing to use the mouse you switch between the two modes. The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  icon together with the associated menus indicate the status of these two modes, when checked the application is in dynamic view mode and the mouse and its buttons can be used to perform translation, scaling and rotation of the graphics model. Additionally the graphic display has symbols drawn in each corner as a visual indication that the application is in dynamic view mode.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm23.bmp\}
\par Dynamic Viewing \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Indicators marked
\par \pard 
\par The dynamic view mode has three options, (two in 2D), being Translation, Scaling and Rotation. Each of these options has its own icon and menu item, \i View / Translate View, View / Scale View \plain\fs20  and \i View / Rotate View\plain\fs20 . Selecting any of these options will enable dynamic viewing (if in data editing mode), or just change dynamic view type, (if already in dynamic view).
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm24.bmp\}
\par Dynamic Viewing \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  View Type Icons
\par \pard 
\par The dynamic view modes use the motion of the mouse between key down and key release to change the view. The translate view mode simply follows the translation of the mouse within the current view plane. The Scale view mode uses the mouse vertical position to scale the current view plane. Moving the mouse up scales the view out, (i.e. model appears further away), whilst moving the mouse down scales the view in.
\par 
\par The rotate dynamic view, (only available in 2D), has two actions depending on the position of  initial mouse selection point. Selecting towards the middle of the image will rotate the line of sight, whilst selecting towards the edge of the view will rotate the view around the line of sight only.
\par \pard 
\par When in dynamic view mode the right mouse button will cycle through the available dynamic view options.
\par 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  2D Module
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The 2D mode works with reduced hard points, i.e. no springs, dampers, pushrods etc., and is in the cross car view only (Y-Z plane). Construction lines are drawn to show instantaneous centres and kinematic roll centre positions. The user can define the required bump/rebound and roll camber, the bump/rebound and roll centre height and the roll centre lateral motion with roll angle. These are compared on the graphs to the current hard points actual solution or with one of the hard points \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 freed off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  are used to illustrate on the suspension graphical display the point location that meets the derivative targets.
\par \pard 
\par Note that steering is not considered in the 2D module as it is by definition a 3D phenomena.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm25.bmp\}
\par 2D module graphics display
\par \pard 
\par In most respects the functionality of the 2D module follows that of the 3D module in-terms of windows, graphics and graphs. Where relevant to the 3D module only features and menus will be disabled.
\par 
\par The 2D module is intended to be a simplified analysis approach with both a reduced variable set and a reduced results set. Its restriction to the cross car plane means that it can not be applied to trailing and semi-trailing type suspensions.
\par 
\par The 2D module has only two basic suspension types, Double Wishbone and Macpherson Strut.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm26.bmp\}
\par 2D Module template types \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  New model menu
\par \pard 
\par The 2D module can be used as a simplified route to a full 3D module. Once you have achieved your required 2D characteristics use the convert to 3D option, \i Solve / Convert 2D to 3D\plain\fs20 , to produce a fully populated 3D single axle model.
\par 
\par Within the 2D module you can use conventional hard point editing, joggling and dragging techniques to modify the suspension derivatives. This the default 2D solve mode as is referred to as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Fix All\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , (\i Solve / 2D Fix Option / Fix All\plain\fs20 ). In this Fix mode the suspension is fully defined/constrained and the displayed results are as constrained by the 2D mechanism. A range of alternative Fix modes are available where one of the hard point constraints can be \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Freed\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  up to allow the required camber curve and roll centre height to define the suspension. These \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 required\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  curves must be defined through the relevant graphs \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 User Line\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  data, (use the right mouse menu on the graphs to \i Edit User Line\'85\plain\fs20 .).
\par \pard 
\par The various available \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Fix\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  modes are set via the \i Solve  /2D Fix Option\plain\fs20  sub menu.
\par 
\par In the 2D module the point dragging has been extended to include selecting the Kingpin Axis point and changing its angle, selecting the ground offset point to change the Kingpin offset at the ground plane and selecting the tyre contact point to drag and change the track.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm27.bmp\}
\par 2D Module \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Example Double Wishbone Top Outer \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Free\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 
\par \pard 
\par \ul 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \plain\b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  2D Suspension Derivatives
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The 2D suspension calculated derivatives for bump/rebound articulations are;
\par 
\par \pard\fi715 1) Camber Angle
\par 2) Roll Centre Height
\par 3) Track Change
\par \pard 
\par Whilst for 2D roll articulation the calculated derivatives are;
\par 
\par \pard\fi715 1) Camber Angle
\par 2) Roll Centre Height
\par 3) Roll Centre Lateral
\par \pard\li1435\fi-1435 
\par \pard All other suspension derivatives are either fixed, (such as Kingpin Angle), or not applicable to the 2D module, (such as toe angle).
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm28.bmp\}
\par 2D Sample Graph \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Includes User and Scope lines
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D Suspension Derivatives
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The 3D mode has four articulation types, bump/rebound, roll, steering and a combined mode. The combined mode allows the user to define an path of combined bump and steering to enable wheel envelopes to be established. The suspension derivatives calculated are;
\par 
\par \pard\fi715 Camber Angle (deg) 
\par Toe Angle (SAE definition) (deg)
\par Toe angle (Plane definition) (deg)
\par Castor Angle (deg)
\par Kingpin Angle (deg)
\par Damper 1 Ratio (-)
\par Spring 1 Ratio (-)
\par Anti Dive (%)
\par Anti Squat (%)
\par Roll Centre Height to Body (mm)
\par Roll Centre Height to Ground (mm)
\par Roll Centre Lateral (mm)
\par Roll Centre X (mm)
\par Roll Centre Y (mm)
\par Roll Centre Z (mm)
\par Half Track Change (mm)
\par Wheel base Change (mm)
\par Damper 1 Travel (mm)
\par Spring 1Travel (mm)
\par Ackermann (%)
\par Turning circle Radius (m)
\par \pard\fi715 Castor Trail (mm)
\par Castor Offset (mm)
\par Kingpin Offset (at wheel centre) (mm)
\par Kingpin Offset (at ground) (mm)
\par Mechanical Trail (mm)
\par Right Hand Side Tyre contact Patch X coord (mm)
\par Right Hand Side Tyre contact Patch Y coord (mm)
\par Right Hand Side Tyre contact Patch Z coord (mm)
\par Left Hand Side Tyre contact Patch X coord (mm)
\par Left Hand Side Tyre contact Patch Y coord (mm)
\par Left Hand Side Tyre contact Patch Z coord (mm)
\par Right Hand Side Hub coordinate X coord (mm)
\par Right Hand Side Hub coordinate Y coord (mm)
\par \pard\fi715 Right Hand Side Hub coordinate Z coord (mm)
\par Left Hand Side Hub coordinate X coord (mm)
\par Left Hand Side Hub coordinate Y coord (mm)
\par Left Hand Side Hub coordinate Z coord (mm)
\par Tyre Vertical Force (N)
\par Swing Arm Length (Front) (mm)
\par Swing Arm ctr Y (Front) (mm)
\par Swing Arm ctr Z (Front) (mm)
\par Swing Arm Length (Side) (mm)
\par Swing Arm ctr X (Side) (mm)
\par Swing Arm ctr Z (Side) (mm)
\par Roll Centre Height (to Body) (mm)
\par Roll Centre Height (to Ground) (mm)
\par TCP dX/dZ Gradient (mm/mm)
\par \pard\fi715 Damper 2 Ratio (-)
\par Spring 2 Ratio (-)
\par Damper 2 Travel (mm)
\par Spring 2Travel (mm)
\par Lunule Steer-Crescent (mm)
\par Point \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 h\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  Power (mm)
\par \pard 
\par 
\par The derivatives can be viewed either individually through the results graphs, select \i Graphs / New/Open\plain\fs20  to open a new/additional graph or via the suspension derivative results file (SDF).
\par 
\par The variable actually displayed on the graph is best changed/set by using the right mouse button on the graph of interest and using the \i Y-Variable\plain\fs20  menu list.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm29.bmp\}
\par Graph Window \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Showing right mouse button Y-variable menu selection
\par \pard 
\par The SDF file can be displayed via the relevant icon or the \i Results / List Formatted SDF File\plain\fs20  menu. The SDF file can be displayed either as a formatted list or as a set of spline coefficients or just as spline data. These last two have a collection of user definable settings that control which articulation types, which results and which ends are shown in the lists.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm30.bmp\}
\par Extract of the formatted SDF file display
\par \pard 
\par All displayed graphs and SDF displays can be printed to produce hard copy records via the \i print\plain\fs20  menu options provided through the standard Windows\'ae printer dialogues.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm31.bmp\}
\par Extract of the SDF splines display
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Limit Boxes
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par For both modes, hard point \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 limit boxes\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  can be switched on, theses boxes are set to allow only a user specified amount of travel in a specific direction. Thus when switched on, a point, (or a group point), cannot be dragged outside of its limit box. These boxes could perform one of two functions, firstly they could be set to represent packaging limitations, or secondly to indicate production tolerances. In the second case the program can run a tolerance analysis for the chosen hard point at all extremes of the limit box, the spread on the chosen derivatives is displayed on the current graphs.
\par \pard 
\par The display of limit boxes have three settings, \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 On\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  but visible and finally \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  and invisible. There is no functional difference between the last two, it merely assists the clarity of the display by removing the additional graphical lines.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm32.bmp\}
\par 3D Graphic Display showing Limit Boxes as On
\par \pard 
\par The behavior and functionality of Limit boxes is identical between the 2D module and the 3D module with the obvious exception of the reduction of tolerances in only two dimensions.
\par 
\par To control the status of Limit boxes use the pull down menu \i Graphics / Point Limits \plain\fs20  sub menu to set as \i Visible\plain\fs20  or to set as \i Use\plain\fs20 , (note that in this context use means \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 On\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . Un-checking \i Use\plain\fs20  will turn limit boxes off but remain visible, whilst un-checking \i Visible\plain\fs20  will set limit boxes to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  irrespective of the current setting).
\par \pard 
\par The first use of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Limit Box\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  is as a constraint on how far a hard points position can be moved in any direction whilst joggling or dragging.
\par 
\par If limit boxes are in use then you cannot \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Joggle\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 drag\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  a point such that it is moved outside of the limit box. Limit boxes are defined as separate +/- distances in each of the three axes, (or two for the 2D module), i.e. a total of six values for the 3D module and four for the 2D module.
\par \pard 
\par Note that it is still possible to edit a point to a position outside of the limit box even when limit boxes are \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . In this instance the limit box is resized to accommodate the new position.
\par 
\par If limit boxes are not in use, (visible or not), when a points position is changed by any of the edit modes, (edit, joggle or drag), the limit box is enlarged if the new position falls outside the currently defined points limits.
\par 
\par Because of this individual point editing, each suspension hard point has its own \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Limit Box\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  dimensions. These can be individually re-set using the \i Solve / Edit Point Tolerances\'85\plain\fs20  menu, identify the required axle and point, and finally edit the values.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm33.bmp\}
\par Selecting the single point prior to editing the limit box settings
\par \pard 
\par To re-set the limit boxes for all point in one step, select \i Solve / Set All Point Tolerances To\'85\plain\fs20  menu and edit the required values, (note that you do not need to enter the negative directions as a \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 ve value, this is assumed).
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm34.bmp\}
\par Editing the point limit box for all points
\par \pard 
\par The second use of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Limit Box\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  is as a design/manufacturing tolerance analysis tool. This is used in conjunction with the \i Solve / Point Tolerance Analysis\plain\fs20  option to display on the graphs the spread of the current derivative over the defined limit box.
\par 
\par Tolerance analysis is applied to a single point at a time, the suspension being solved for its current position, each corner and each mid point of the limit box cube, (total of 27 positions for the 3D module). Before being able to run the tolerance analysis the analysis hard point needs to be identified, (select from tree style selection box). Subsequent tolerance runs will not request for the analysis hard point as by default the previously selected point will be used. To change to a different tolerance point use the \i Solve / Set Tolerance Point\'85\plain\fs20  menu and identify the new point.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm35.bmp\}
\par Example tolerance analysis Graphics and Graph displays
\par \pard 
\par With tolerance analysis switched \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  the model can be dynamically viewed and/or edited in exactly the same way as normally. Because of the increased number of solution loops the refresh time will be significantly increased. Once a tolerance point has been defined you can switch between tolerance on/off either via the menu \i Solve / Point Tolerance Analysis\plain\fs20  or the equivalent toolbar icon.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm36.bmp\}
\par Tolerance analysis toolbar Icon
\par 
\par \pard Tolerance boxes when visible can be picked and dragged just like a suspension hard point. Select a tolerance box corner point with the left mouse button and drag (or joggle) it to the required position.
\par 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Graphs
\par \pard\li1435\fi-1435 \plain\fs20 
\par \pard The primary results display method for the application is through the derivatives graphs. Each graph show a single user selected derivative over the current suspension articulation. Any number of graphs can be opened and positioned within the display using either the \i Graphs / New/Open\plain\fs20  menu or equivalent icon.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm37.bmp\}
\par New Graph toolbar Icon
\par \pard 
\par In addition to plotting SDF on the graphs users can also plot Results from some of the graphical elements that have been added to the template, such as the distance between two points. These are then displayed and updated in the same way as SDF graphs. The only restriction is that Graphical element results are not involved in user lines and hence the optimizer.
\par 
\par The appearance and settings of each graph can be changed through either the \i Graphs\plain\fs20  pull down menu or the graph\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s right mouse menu. By selecting a graph with the right mouse button this implies that any changes made from the menu items is applied to the selected graph only.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm38.bmp\}
\par Graph right mouse button menu
\par \pard 
\par As each new graph is opened the y-variable is taken as the next in the available list. To change the displayed variable, use the right-mouse menu and select from the available \i Y-Variable\plain\fs20  list.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm39.bmp\}
\par Graph Y-variable list - right mouse button menu
\par \pard 
\par For a model with both front and rear axles defined, two data lines will be drawn one for each suspension end. They will use different symbols, line colours and show a key to aid identification of the two results. Similarly if both left and right hand wheels are displayed on the graphical display, so both lines will be drawn on the graphs, again using different line colours to identify them.
\par 
\par Eight lines per wheel can be displayed on each results graph, (ignoring repeat lines with tolerance analysis). These lines being the \b Data Line\plain\fs20  the \b User Line\plain\fs20  and 5x \b Scope Lines\plain\fs20 . The data line is the current hard points results. The user line is an editable curve principally for visually identifying the required targets for the derivative. The scope lines are for saving incremental results to enable comparison of subsequent changes to the stored plots.
\par \pard 
\par A number of menus are available to aid moving data between the Line data sets. These include;
\par 
\par \pard\fi715 Graphs / Copy Front/2D Data to User
\par \i Graphs / Copy Rear Data to User
\par Graphs / Copy Front/2D Scope to User
\par \plain\fs20 Graphs / Copy Rear Scope to User
\par Graphs / Clear Current User Line
\par \pard 
\par The \b Scope\plain\fs20  line data is \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 grabbed\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  by using the menu \i Graphs / Scope Line Store\plain\fs20  and is cleared by using \i Graphs / Clear Scope Store\plain\fs20 . Scope lines are stored in positions 1 to 5. An exclusive option is available to just store the current to position one and empty all other scope lines as well as an option to grab the current line into scope position one having first shuffled any ther scope lines down one position.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm40.bmp\}
\par Example graph showing all three line types displayed
\par \pard 
\par The deviation between the Data Line and the current Scope and User lines can be listed as a numerical sum. The displayed value is the cumulative sum of the difference for each calculated position. To display these values use \i Graphs / Visibility Deviation Values\plain\fs20 . The scope line used for the difference number can be changed to any of the five positions.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm41.bmp\}
\par Example graph showing all deviation values displayed
\par \pard 
\par As a useful aid to identifying suspension characteristics, the gradient of the displayed curves can be listed both next to each individual point and for the ride condition. To turn these on use the \i Graphs / Visibility / Deviation Values\plain\fs20 .\i 
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm42.bmp\}
\par Example graph showing static gradient value highlighted
\par \pard 
\par \b Additional Graph properties that can be defined are;
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \i Axis Scales\plain\fs20 : Set the minimum and maximum x and y axis values. The autoscale option can also be used to automatically set the scales.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm43.bmp\}
\par \pard 
\par \i Visibility\plain\fs20 : Set the visibility of individual graph items, Grid Lines, Deviation Values, Point Symbols, Data Values, Derivative Values, Scope Line User Line.
\par 
\par \i Colours\plain\fs20 : Sets the colour of individual graph items, Grid Lines, Background, Axis Lines + Text, Border Region, Data Line 2D/3D Front, Data Line 3D Rear, Scope Line 2D/3D Front, Scope Line 3D Rear and User Line.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm44.bmp\}
\par \pard 
\par \i Line Markers\plain\fs20 : Set the marker for individual graph lines, Data Line 2D/3D Front, Data Line 3D Rear, Scope Line 2D/3D Front, Scope Line 3D Rear, User Line 2D and User Line 3D.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm45.bmp\}
\par \pard 
\par \i Switch x-y\plain\fs20 : Switches the position of the x-y axis from the conventional x horizontal y vertical setup.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm46.bmp\}
\par \pard 
\par \i Marker Sizes\plain\fs20 : Sets the size of the markers used for each line type, Data Marker, Scope Marker and User marker.
\par 
\par \i Text Sizes\plain\fs20 : Sets the size of the text labels for, Graph Data Values, Compliance Title, Compliance Label and compliance value.
\par 
\par \i Decimal Points Display\plain\fs20 : Defines the number of decimal points used to display numerical values. Individual values are X-Data Listing, Y-Data Listing, Derivative Data Listing, Scope Deviation, User Deviation, x-axis label, y-axis label and compliance graph.
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Enhanced Graphics
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par Enhanced graphical elements can be switched on for improved visualization of the defined model. These options have no impact on the numerical results being just aids to model viewing.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm42.bmp\}
\par Enhanced Graphics Menu Item
\par \pard 
\par The elements affected by enhanced graphics are;
\par 
\par Spring, Damper, Wheel (and tyre), Pivot Axes, Grid, Body, Tubes, Tri-Facets, Triad Symbol, Origin marker, C of G marker, Moving ground and wheels and Roll Axis. An additional set of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 enhanced graphics\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  that indicate a distance measure also form part of the Enhanced graphics function. These provide distance (either in component form or resultant form) from point to point, point to line, line to line etc. Other graphics primitives such as circles, spheres, planes and cylinders also form part of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 enhanced graphics\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  set.
\par \pard 
\par For the Body element it is not sufficient to turn this \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  to get the graphical body image drawn, unless a body type has already been defined either in the file or from the \i Data\plain\fs20  menu. To add/modify a default Body to the model use the \i Data / Body Type \plain\fs20 sub menu
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm47.bmp\}
\par Enhanced Graphics body data menu
\par \pard 
\par The settings for enhanced graphics visibility are stored to the users ini file.
\par 
\par To toggle the enhanced graphics visibility\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s use the \i Graphics / Enhanced Visibility\plain\fs20  menus or the equivalent view toolbar icons.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm48.bmp\}
\par Enhanced Graphics toolbar icons highlighted
\par \pard 
\par It is possible to view/edit all graphic settings through one single interface. This \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Settings\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  display can be opened via the \i Edit / All Settings\plain\fs20  menu item or the \i Ctrl +S\plain\fs20  shortcut. This provides a single control point for all graphics settings with recourse to a large number of individual pull-down menu selections.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm49.bmp\}
\par Graphics \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Settings\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  Display \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Graphics Tab Selected
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Defaults
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par All user definable settings are saved by the application when it has a normal program exit to its \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 ini\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  file. The location of this ini file depends on the version of Windows currently being used. The file name is \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'91\f1 shark.ini\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\plain\fs20  and will be saved to either C:\'5cwindows or C:\'5cwinnt. This file is not directly editable by the user but there are occasions when it is useful to understand where it is and what it stores.
\par 
\par All colours, symbols, visibility, line types and graphics size defaults that can be set by the user are saved to this file. In addition it will retain window sizes, folder settings, and recent open files.
\par \pard 
\par At application start-up this file is searched for in the relevant Windows folder and if found read in to overwrite the internal default settings.
\par 
\par In some extreme instances this file can become corrupt preventing the application from correctly starting. It may in this instance be thus necessary to delete this file. Deleting this file will return all defaults to the internally \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 hard coded\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  values.
\par 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Data Entry
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par Data entry is through standard Windows style dialogue boxes. These employ standard text and numeric widgets, together with check boxes and selection boxes. Spread sheet style entry where used supports cut and paste from external applications via the clipboard.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm50.bmp\}
\par Example spread sheet data entry
\par \pard 
\par When using \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 paste\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  into a Shark spread sheet it is only necessary to select the location of the top left hand cell of the paste are that the paste is intended to fill, do not drag and highlight the entire target area.
\par 
\par The main data entry to the program will be of the suspension hard points x,y,z co-ordiantes. The normal route to enter this is to select \i File / New \plain\fs20  and identify the required suspension end, (or both) and the required suspension template type(s). Each suspension template has default co-ordiante data associated with it to provide a easy model creation process. These default co-ordinates can be changed singularly through the on screen data edit modes of Edit, Joggle and Drag or be edited collectively through a spread sheet. The suspension data can be edited directly from the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 File \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  New\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  dialogue box at the point of model creation by selecting the relevant icon. Alternatively it can be accessed at any time after model creation via the relevant Data toolbar icon.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm51.bmp\}
\par Data toolbar icon \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  suspension co-ordinates display
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Saving Hard Points
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par In the 3D module the suspension hard points can be saved either to a temporary storage for later recall during the program run, or saved to a new data file to provide a permanent record of the data input for subsequent program runs. The temporary storage facility is not available with the 2D module, the only recourse being to save the to disc as data files.
\par 
\par The menu item \i Data / Coordinates Save\'85\plain\fs20 option will open a text entry box to enable a unique \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 save-set\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  label to be entered. This label is how the user can identify, re-load and delete it at a later stage. Coordinate sets saved in this way are only to temporary storage. Once the application is exited all coordinate save-sets are lost.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm52.bmp\}
\par 3D Save-Set \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Label Entry
\par \pard 
\par Once a coordinate set has been saved it can be recalled via the relevant menu entry under \i Data / Coordinates / Recall Saved\plain\fs20  sub menu. Additional \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Save-Set\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  menu items are available to delete either individual save sets, (\i Data / Coordinates / Delete /\'85.\plain\fs20 ) or all save-sets, (\i Data / Coordinates / Delete All\plain\fs20 ).
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm53.bmp\}
\par 3D Save-Set \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Recalling a saved coordinate set
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Animation
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par Both the 2D and 3D modules support animation of the defined models. The suspension system will be animated through a sequence of steps, appropriate to the current view mode. In the simplest mode this is over its current articulation distance, i.e. bump/rebound, roll, steer or combined. During the animation users can continue to edit and change co-ordinates, dynamically view the model or any other menu function as normally. To switch the animation on/off select the menu item \i View / Animation (On/Off)\plain\fs20 .
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm54.bmp\}
\par Graphics Toolbar icons - Animate Icon highlighted
\par \pard 
\par When in bump/rebound displacement type the animation display is affected by the current setting for ground plane solution type, (\i Solve / Motion / Ground Plane)\plain\fs20 . In one instance the body points are fixed and the ground plane is moved, whilst in the alternative case the ground plane is fixed and the body points are moved. This does not alter the numerical results for the suspension characteristics only the visual appearance of the animation.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm55.bmp\}
\par File Toolbar icons \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Ground plane Icons highlighted
\par \pard 
\par The animation function also applies to view modes other than displacement articulation. These include deformed geometry, modal shape and Forced-Damped response. A screen display mode tool, \i View / Set Display Mode Tool\'85\plain\fs20  allows control of these display modes.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm56.bmp\}
\par Setting the Screen Display Mode
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Edit Undo
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par After a number of changes to the suspension hard points coordinates, it is possible to step back through the changes undoing them step by step. The menu item \i Edit / Undo\plain\fs20  can be used for this or more conveniently the equivalent short cut key strokes \b Ctrl+Z\plain\fs20 . If this menu is not available then no edit events are left in the buffer to undo.
\par 
\par The undo buffer length can be modified from the default value, (20 steps), via the \i SetUp / Undo Buffer Length\plain\fs20  menu item.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm57.bmp\}
\par Edit undo buffer length setting
\par \pard 
\par The edit undo buffer is always emptied whenever a model is loaded or saved. Thus either of these actions will lose the stored changes and hence the ability to undo any previous changes.
\par 
\par The undo buffer can be completely disabled if required by setting the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Buffer Length\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  to zero. The only conceivable reason for doing this would be if it was causing an unexplained failure or it was required to run two instances of the product on the same machine, (presuming you are licensed to do so), where the undo scratch files would attempt to overwrite each other.
\par \pard 
\par A by-product of the edit undo feature is that it is used to trap for machine / application failures. The temporary undo files are searched for on start-up and if found indicate a improper previous shut-down of the application. If detected the user is notified and the opportunity given to re-store the latest scratch file.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm58.bmp\}
\par \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Data Recovery\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  dialogue box
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Converting 2D to 3D
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par Suspension hard points in the 2D mode can be converted to full 3D data set via a program option. The user selects the 3D suspension type required and gives the additional data requirements requested, i.e. wheelbase, kingpin angle etc. Thus migration from a simple 2D concept suspension model to a full 3D suspension is a simple procedure.
\par 
\par Once the required 2D model has achieved the required suspension characteristics, to convert to 3D select \i Solve / Convert 2D to 3D\plain\fs20 . The displayed dialogue box requires the user to identify which of the valid default template types should be used, (this list will vary depending on the 2D template type used). In addition specific 3D properties need to be entered to assist in defining the properties in the third dimension.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm59.bmp\}
\par 2D to 3D conversion data
\par \pard 
\par It is not possible to add a 2D converted model as the rear axle to an existing 3D model that has a front axle already defined. The existing 3D model data will be lost.
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Managing User Lines
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par User Lines are displayed on the \uldb graph\plain\fs20  results to visually identify the required suspension characteristics as hard point geometry is modified. Since these user lines are not considered to be part of the model, they are not saved to the data file. Thus any entered target user lines are lost whenever the application is closed.
\par 
\par The mechanism for the creation, saving and data-basing of user lines is the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Manage User Lines\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  function. Managing user lines is through \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Data Sets\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , any number of data sets can be created on either the local machine or a networked server. Each data set can then contain any number of user line sets, (in this instance a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 user line set\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  refers to a user line for each possible characteristic over each possible articulation mode).
\par \pard 
\par The data set references are stored in the users \uldb ini file\plain\fs20  such that on program start-up these data sets are searched for and if found added to the menu list. Once on the menu list individual user line sets can be loaded from a data set and hence used within the result graphs.
\par 
\par To create a new data set select \i Graphs / Manage User Lines / Create New DataSet\'85\plain\fs20  and browse to the required file location, (creating a new folder if necessary).
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm60.bmp\}
\par Creating a new Data Set
\par \pard 
\par As part of the data set creation you will be required to define a unique label for the data set. This unique label is how the data set will be referred to when selecting sets from, sets to, or deleting from the list.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm61.bmp\}
\par Defining the data set label
\par \pard 
\par Creating a data set will automatically add it to the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 loaded\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  data sets list. If you require to pick up a data set created by an other user, (and perhaps saved to another networked machine/server), use the \i Graphs / Manage User Lines / Include DataSet\'85\plain\fs20  use the browser in the conventional way to locate the required data set.
\par 
\par When initially created a data set will have no saved user line sets. You must subsequently add your user line sets to the required data set to make it available on subsequent re-use.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm62.bmp\}
\par Adding the current user lines definition to a data set.
\par \pard 
\par Once a data set contains user lines these can be subsequently used by selecting \i Graphs / Manage User Lines / Load From\plain\fs20  and then select the required data set and user line set, (remember that one data set can contain many user line sets).
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Compliance Solving
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The standard solution technique within SHARK is for rigid body kinematic motion only. A separately licensed feature enables a linear complaint analysis to be superimposed on top of the incremental kinematic solutions. This allows users to perform modal analysis and Forced-Damped response.
\par 
\par To invoke the compliant solution select the \i Solve / 3D Compliance\plain\fs20  menu option, (note that the complaint solver is not available in the 2D module). If this menu item is \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 greyed out\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  you are not licensed for this feature, (check with your software vendor or local support staff).
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm63.bmp\}
\par File toolbar icon - Enabling the compliant solver
\par \pard 
\par In its simplest form the compliant solver requires no additional data to be added to the model, (default values are assumed for tyre vertical stiffness and suspension spring rate and preload). It will treat all connection points as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 spherical rigids\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . In this form the rigids do have a stiffness value, but a high value. The default value for the rigids can be modified by the user, see \i Data / Compliance Data / General Data\'85\plain\fs20 
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm64.bmp\}
\par Editing the default \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Rigids\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  stiffness value
\par \pard 
\par With all rigid joints in the model, the only significant deflection will be caused by the flexibility of the tyre vertical stiffness. The deflection is caused by the suspension spring load. Tyre vertical stiffness values can be accessed through the \i Data / Compliance Data / Tyre Properties\'85\plain\fs20  menu (when in compliant mode) or through the equivalent \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Graph + Data\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  toolbar icon. Whilst the spring properties are accessed through the \i Data / Compliance Data / Spring Properties\'85
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm65.bmp\}
\par Editing the compliance data spring properties
\par \pard 
\par Additional graphical display features are used within the compliant solver, the visibility of which is set under the \i Graphics / Compliance Visibility\plain\fs20  sub menu and their properties under the\i  Graphics / Compliance Colours \plain\fs20 and \i Graphics / Compliance Sizes\plain\fs20  sub menus.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm66.bmp\}
\par Example \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 all-rigid\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  compliant model graphical display.
\par \pard 
\par With the compliance model enabled additional results options are available. These include deflections and forces of the joints. Whilst deflections of the joints will be small, until we add compliant bushes, the joint forces can be used to list forces in the system due to the spring load.
\par 
\par All rigid joints can be edited to have \uldb compliant bush\plain\fs20  properties with three translation and three rotation stiffnesses defined. The orientation of the bushes can be aligned along any user specified local coordinate system.
\par \pard 
\par Additional \uldb external forces\plain\fs20  can be applied to the model, any number of forces can be attached to individual parts under user defined magnitude and direction.
\par 
\par The majority of the kinematic plotting, editing and viewing functions are unchanged when using the compliant solver. The only exception involves the data editing of a suspension hard point. With the compliant solver on the data edit window is extended to include the points bush properties.
\par 
\par You can toggle between kinematic and compliant solver types with no loss of data. Complaint bush properties and external forces are all saved as part of the model. Note that even if a model contains compliant data when it is first loaded into the application it will appear in kinematic mode.
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Compliance Bushes
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The joints in a compliant model can be either rigid, (in which case they use the default high stiffness value), or bushed. Bushed joints require the user to define three translational stiffness rates values and three rotational stiffness rates, (although some may be zero, particularly the rotational rates).
\par 
\par In compliant solver mode picking a suspension hard point to edit will display not only the points coordinates but also its bush properties. To switch between a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Ball Joint\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  (rigid) and a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Bush\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  (compliant) check the required box in the edit display. When set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 compliant\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  the bush properties can then be edited.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm67.bmp\}
\par Bush Editing display \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Complaint option ringed.
\par \pard 
\par The bush definition requires a local coordinate system to be defined and then three translation stiffnesses and three rotational stiffnesses. The stiffnesses are defined in this local bush axis.
\par 
\par Bush coordinate systems have their origin at the suspensions hard point coordinates. The local z-axis is then defined as either, an absolute position, a position relative to the origin, or as another point in the model. In the case of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 point in the model\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  this is a continuous setting such that if the reference point is moved the bush coordinate system is automatically modified.
\par \pard 
\par To complete the axis definition a second point is defined that is assumed to lie in the x-z plane. The point in a plane approach is used rather than a second axis point as it is easier to identify a plane rather than an orthogonal axis. This x-z plane point can be either in absolute coordinates or relative coordinates, (note relative to the origin not relative to the z-axis point).
\par 
\par The defined bush coordinate system can be seen on the 3D graphics display. Both the definition points and the actual orthogonal axes are drawn, subject to separate visibility switches. To ensure both are visible use \i Graphics / Compliance Visibility / Bush Axis Points\plain\fs20  and \i Graphics / Compliance Visibility / Bush Local Axes\plain\fs20 . When these items are \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 checked\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  they will be drawn on the 3D display.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm68.bmp\}
\par Setting the visibility options for the Bush axes.
\par \pard 
\par If the bush axes definition points are visible they can be dynamically picked and edited on screen just like any hard point, (the only difference is that to avoid cluttering the display, the current \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tracking lines\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  are not drawn through them). Remember that if a z-axis point is defined as a model point then \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dragging\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  the hard point will also drag the z-axis definition point.
\par 
\par If using coincident points, bush axes definition points will appear on the point lists as model hard point number + 1000 or model hard point number + 2000. The +1000 point is the z-axis point whilst the +2000 point is the x-z plane point.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm69.bmp\}
\par 3D Display - Bush axes visibility
\par \pard 
\par The bush axes definition points are displayed with labels Pz and Px-z, The local axis points have labels X\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , Y\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  and Z\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
\par 
\par To enable a Forced-Damped response to be predicted in the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 compliance\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode, damping values for each bush need to be defined. Default values are applied in a similar manner to stiffness, the setting for which can be edited through \i Data / Compliance Data / General Data\plain\fs20 . Note that for a bush the damping is defined in terms of a loss angle (deg). Damping is also included for the damper(s), this is editable as a property of the damper and is defined in conventional damping terms (N.s/m).
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm70.bmp\}
\par Damping \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Editing the Damper Value
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Compliance External Forces
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par External forces can be applied as part of the compliant model. External forces are defined in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 sets\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . The external forces can be applied either in isolation or in addition to the defined spring force. It is also possible to switch all external forces off, or individual force sets, (note you could turn both spring and external forces off and thus have no forces or compliant displacements in the model).
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm71.bmp\}
\par Controlling the inclusion of the Spring Force
\par \pard 
\par The force set intended for interactive user use is the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 zero\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  position set. By default an additional 7 further force sets are pre-filled to simulate Lotus \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 standard\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  analysis load cases. The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 standard\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  sets are saved to the users ini file such that they may be modified to suit particular end users requirements. /users can add/delete user force sets as required. Each force set can contain any number of forces, each force having a defined magnitude attachment point and orientation. To edit the external force data select \i Data / Compliance Data / External Forces\'85\plain\fs20  
\par \pard 
\par The edit display shows one force set and one force in the set at a time to view the properties of other forces or sets use the two sets of arrow keys to migrate through the defined forces.
\par 
\par Each force is associated to a suspension corner of the model, and a part of the model for that corner. Its properties include a magnitude and a direction defined by two points. The two points define the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 head\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tail\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  of the force. Head and tail definitions can be in absolute coordinates or relative coordinates. The relative coordinates being relative to a chosen hard point, (note that added to the hard points list is the tyre contact point).
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm72.bmp\}
\par External Force Data Edit \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Add force to set highlighted
\par \pard 
\par Each force set has its own \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on/off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  setting, likewise each individual force within a force set has a separate \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on/off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  allowing complete customisation of the defined forces.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm73.bmp\}
\par External Force 3D Display \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Longitudinal Force to TCP
\par \pard 
\par External forces are displayed on the 3D graphical display. The display shows both the definition points and the force vector. The external force visibilities are set via \i Graphics / Compliance Visibilities\plain\fs20  individual menu items are available the force vector and the force definition axis. External force vectors can be drawn either in fixed length form or at a scaled length, (scaled length based on magnitude). To change the fixed length size, or the magnitude scalar, edit the relevant fields in \i Graphics / Compliance Sizes / Edit Sizes\'85\plain\fs20  Note that changing the visibility setting of forces to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  does not imply that they are not used in the calculation of forces.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm74.bmp\}
\par Setting external force visibilities and style
\par \pard 
\par If the force axis definition points are visible they can be dynamically picked and edited on screen just like any hard point, (the only difference is that to avoid cluttering the display, the current \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tracking lines\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  are not drawn through them). Remember that if an axis point is defined as relative to a model point then \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dragging\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  the hard point will also drag the axis definition point.
\par 
\par If using coincident points, force axes definition points will appear on the point lists as force number + 3000 or force number + 4000. The +3000 point is the head axis point whilst the +4000 point is the tail axis point.
\par \pard 
\par Only one force set can be displayed on the 3D display at any one time. By default this is the zero set. The results displayed in the graphs will also be those of the currently displayed force set. Thus when changing to a different force set both the 3D display and the graphs change to reflect the new load set.
\par 
\par The main use of multiple load sets is to provide a set of \uldb compliance coefficients\plain\fs20  based on standard analysis cases. These can show at a glance the overall compliant response of the suspension model.
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Compliance Coefficients
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The compliance coefficients function is aimed at providing a single display of the overall compliant behavior of the vehicle model when subjected to a series of standard forces.
\par 
\par A number of \uldb external force\plain\fs20  sets are defined that together specify a series of tests. Each force set can contain a number of different forces that are applied to various parts with defined magnitude and direction. To assess the complaint response to these force sets using the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 standard\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  graphs is time consuming and not immediately visual. The compliant coefficients display provide a overall user definable summary of the compliant response.
\par \pard 
\par To display the coefficients display select \i Results / Display Compliance Values\'85\plain\fs20  The display shows for each force set, (including force set 0), a series of bar charts. The number of bars displayed on each forces sets chart depends on both the number of axles modelled and the number of variables selected.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm75.bmp\}
\par Compliance Coefficients display
\par \pard 
\par Each bar represents the difference between the kinematic value and the compliant value of the chosen variable at the static ride condition. The compliant value can optionally include the spring force, (see right mouse menu on display).
\par 
\par The height of the bar is controlled by a notional scalar, each variable in each force set has its own full screen deflection scalar. To edit the scalar values select the required variables bars with right mouse button and select \i Edit Scale Setting\plain\fs20 . Note that the right mouse menu will appear in either \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 brief\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  or \plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 long\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  form depending if the right mouse pick is on a bar area or just on the chart.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm76.bmp\}
\par Compliance Coefficients \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 long\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  menu form
\par \pard 
\par Variables can be added to or removed from a individual load sets display using the \i Add Extra Variable \plain\fs20 and \i Remove Selected Variable\plain\fs20  right mouse menu items. 
\par 
\par Each bar can have its own guide limit line added to its display, (by default all values are set as 0 and hence don\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t appear). This is intended to provide a visual guide to the target curve without needing to read the numerical values of each bar.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm77.bmp\}
\par Guide Lines Added to Set 1 display
\par \pard 
\par By default, force set zero is the set displayed on the 3D display and in the graphs. This is indicated on the Compliance display by the red box around its chart. To change the display\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s to show one of the other force sets use the \i Make Force Set Default\plain\fs20  option from the right mouse menu. The red highlight will then indicate the change and the displays refreshed.
\par 
\par The right mouse menu also provides an easy method for turning individual force sets \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , (\i Turn Force Set \plain\f0\i\fs20 \'91\f1 Off\plain\f0\i\fs20 \'92\f1 )\plain\fs20 , gaining access to the external force data, (\i Open External Force Edit),\plain\fs20  make all force sets on, (\i Turn All Force Sets On\plain\fs20 ) and toggle the inclusion of the spring force in the compliance calculations, (\i Include Spring force in Set)\plain\fs20 .
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Deformed Geometry Animation
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par As with the kinematic solution the compliant model can be \uldb animated\plain\fs20  over the currently specified articulation. The additional feature of animating the displacements of the compliant model is the inclusion to the display of the calculated forces. To set the visibility of the calculated forces set \i Graphics / Compliance Visibility / Calculated Forces.\plain\fs20 
\par 
\par The additional animation type that can be applied to a compliant model is that of the deformed geometry. This is similar in concept to the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 mode shape\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  animation used in Finite Element packages. 
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm78.bmp\}
\par Example Deformed Geometry Plot
\par \pard 
\par Deformed geometry animation, cycles through a series of display steps between the kinematic solutions positions and the compliant position. This animation is performed for a specific articulation position, (normally the ride position), although the user can select which animation position to animate at, (\i View / Deformed Geometry Position\plain\fs20 ). Where 0 is the ride position 1 is the first bump/roll or steer position, (as appropriate). If the position number entered is greater than the number of increments it will be clipped to the maximum.
\par \pard 
\par Because the deformations can be small animating in steps between kinematic and compliant may need scaling to enhance visualization. The deformed geometry scalar can be set by \i View / Deformed Geometry Scalar\plain\fs20 . The setting of this will distort all displayed 3D compliant images, so should be set back to 1.0 when not required.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm79.bmp\}
\par Setting the deformed geometry scalar
\par \pard 
\par Deformed geometry animation can be turned \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  with one of two options, \i View / Animation (On/Off), \plain\fs20 with Screen Display Mode set to \i Deformed Geometry\plain\fs20 . The two options are with or without spring forces. Whilst both options function in the same way the second option will illustrate the bush deflection due to the applied external forces only and not the combination of external forces and spring force. The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Set Display Mode\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  tool allows a convenient single point to control animation and display modes, \i View / Set Display Mode Tool\plain\fs20 .
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm80.bmp\}
\par Specifying Deformed Geometry Display via the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 display mode\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  tool.
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Hard Point Joggle
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The suspension hard points can be selected from the screen via the mouse and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 joggled\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  to a new position, the suspension derivatives being re-calculated as the hard point is moved. The selected derivatives that are being displayed graphically are updated during the hard point screen joggling. Point joggling can be in a 2D view along both viewed axes, a single axis or joggling in a 3D view along a selected axis direction.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm18.bmp\}
\par Graphics Screen \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Joggling mode, tracking lines show Y axis direction.
\par \pard 
\par The majority of the point joggling functionality is performed using a combination of left and right mouse buttons. The mouse buttons are also used extensively for the dynamic viewing option and thus this \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 sharing\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  requires a switch between \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 edit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode.
\par 
\par Point joggling is one part of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Edit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode. The other two parts are direct editing and point \uldb dragging\plain\fs20 .
\par 
\par To indicate when the application is in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode and when in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Edit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode not only are the relevant menus and icons \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 checked\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  but also \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 corners\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  are added to the graphic display when in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm15.bmp\}
\par Graphics Screen \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Indicating in Dynamic View mode.
\par \pard 
\par To change to editing mode un-select \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic viewing\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  using \i View / Dynamic Viewing / Off\plain\fs20 . Alteratively select the dynamic viewing icon from the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  toolbar.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm16.bmp\}
\par Dynamic Viewing Icon- Shown as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
\par \pard 
\par When in point joggling mode \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tracking lines\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  are drawn to indicate the current \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tracking\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  direction(s). To change the current tracking direction the right mouse button will cycle through the available tracking direction options. A similar action is achieved by selecting the mouse icon from the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  toolbar.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm17.bmp\}
\par Mouse Icon \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Cycles through tracking options.
\par \pard 
\par Selecting any of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Edit icons\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  changes the mode to edit and cancels the dynamic view mode. In a similar way selecting any of the three dynamic view icons changes to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode.
\par 
\par The joggle symbol indicates the number of tracking directions available and also which of the four arrow keys, (left, right, up and down), is likely to be used. To use joggle select either Ctrl + Arrow Key for coarse joggle or Shift + Arrow Key for fine joggle. The joggle fine size is a tenth of the coarse size, the coarse size can be set via \i SetUp / Gen Defaults\'85\plain\fs20 
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm81.bmp\}
\par Setting the default Coarse Joggle Step Size
\par \pard 
\par Point joggling is affected by both \uldb Groups\plain\fs20  and \uldb Coincident points\plain\fs20 . The settings for groups and point coincidence change a single point pick and joggle event into a potential single point pick but multiple point joggle, (using a temporary group). In the case of groups, the current groups points are all translated by the same amount. Whilst for point coincidence only the point or points selected from a displayed list are moved, again all selected points are moved by the same amount.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm19.bmp\}
\par Example Coincident point pick
\par \pard 
\par The coincident point selection feature is switched on via the \i Solve / Point Coincidence\plain\fs20  menu. When switched off the nearest point to the picked position is always selected. The tolerance used to decide whether two points are coincident, can be changed via the \i SetUp / Gen Defaults\'85\plain\fs20  menu. A similar tolerance exists to control whether a point is within the pick region.
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Point Coincidence
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The Point Coincidence function controls the modification of hard point coordinates. When enabled selecting a point that is in close proximity to another the user is prompted to identify, which of the points within the coincidence tolerance is to be edited. To enable point coincidence select \i Solve / Point Coincidence\plain\fs20 .
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm82.bmp\}
\par Enabling point coincidence
\par \pard 
\par Coincidence tolerance defines the radius in the view plane from the picked point that is used to check for coincident points. If coincident points are found a menu is displayed listing the points found. You can then either select one of the identified points or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 All Points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . Selecting \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 all points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  is equivalent creating a temporary group, all points are then moved by the same amount, (note that this does not make them coincident).
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm19.bmp\}
\par Example Coincident point pick
\par \pard 
\par When the coincident point function is switched off the nearest point to the picked position is always selected. The tolerance used to decide whether two points are coincident, can be changed via the \i SetUp / Gen Defaults\'85\plain\fs20  menu.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm83.bmp\}
\par Setting the Coincident point tolerance
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Data File Text Editor
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The Data file text editor is a dialogue box that can be used to view and edit data files in a purely textual environment. This is an advanced user feature only that is primarily intended for debugging use and is not recommended as a normal working practice. This is primarily because the data file format is not formally declared.
\par 
\par To load a saved data file into it use the local menu \i File / Open\plain\fs20  alternatively to load the current model into the display select from the local menu \i File / Load Current\plain\fs20 .
\par \pard 
\par Any edited changes can either be saved to a file , \i File / Save \plain\fs20  or \i File / Save As\plain\fs20  or the current model can be updated with the contents of the text display using \i File / Make Current\plain\fs20 .
\par 
\par Note that the current model and the data text display are only synchronized when a \i Load Current \plain\fs20 or \i Make Current\plain\fs20  command has just been made. Once a data change in either has been made they will only then be synchronized when the change is \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 made current\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  to the other.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm84.bmp\}
\par Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Text Data File Editor
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Hard Point Editing
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par Hard point editing is the simplest method of editing single suspension hard points values. In the 3D \uldb module\plain\fs20  complete display and editing of the hard points can be carried out via the alternative \uldb spread sheet display\plain\fs20 .
\par 
\par The mouse buttons are used extensively for both editing and the dynamic viewing option and thus this \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 sharing\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  requires a switch between \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 edit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode.
\par 
\par Direct editing is one part of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Edit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode. The other two parts are point dragging and joggle editing.
\par \pard 
\par To indicate when the application is in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode and when in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Edit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode not only are the relevant menus and icons \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 checked\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  but also \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 corners\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  are added to the graphic display when in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm15.bmp\}
\par Graphics Screen \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Indicating in Dynamic View mode.
\par \pard 
\par To change to editing mode un-select \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic viewing\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  using \i View / Dynamic Viewing / Off\plain\fs20 . Alteratively select the dynamic viewing icon from the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  toolbar.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm16.bmp\}
\par Dynamic Viewing Icon- Shown as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
\par \pard 
\par When in edit mode \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tracking lines\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  are drawn to indicate the current \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tracking\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  direction(s). This is not relevant to the hard point-editing mode as tracking only applies to the dragging and joggle edit modes.
\par 
\par Selecting any of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Edit icons\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  changes the mode to edit and cancels the dynamic view mode. In a similar way selecting any of the three dynamic view icons changes to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode.
\par 
\par When in direct editing mode to edit a point select it with the left mouse button on the graphics display. The displayed dialogue box will be different if in the 2D module or the 3D module.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm85.bmp\}
\par 2D Direct Data Editing
\par \pard 
\par 3D data editing lists the selected hard points x, y and z co-ordinate. To change simply edit and select \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Ok\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . Note that the cancel button or the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Esc\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  key will close the edit box and ignore any changes. To subsequently undo a change, use the \uldb undo\plain\fs20  function.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm86.bmp\}
\par 3D Direct Data Editing
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Import and Export to Adams Sub Systems
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par A utility routine is provided that enables suspension hard point coordinates to be transferred to and from an Adams sub-system model. This transfer is facilitated by the use of a supplementary text string that can be assigned to each hard point within Lotus Suspension Analysis (LSA). This text string is the label that is used within the Adams sub-system (and thus relies on consistent naming within your Adams sub-systems). The routine works on one end at a time since an Adams sub-system model would normally only have a single suspension corner modeled. Thus if the LSA model is a full vehicle, the user needs to identify which LSA end is to be used. See local menu setting under \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1\i Data / Import to Front\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1\i Data /Import to Rear\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . The same setting is assumed on Export only the local menu text changes.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm87.bmp\}
\par The Import/Export Display , Shown for Import, \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 scale\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 shift\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 switch\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  items highlighted.
\par \pard 
\par The import and export routine also has the option to shift the values, scale the values and switch the axis order. On import the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 shift\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  is added to the value in the Adams sub-system, whilst on export the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 shift\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  is subtracted from the LSA value. A shift value can be defined independently for x, y and z. A similar editing display is provided for the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 scale\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  settings, the default values for which are 1.0.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm88.bmp\}
\par Editing The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Shift\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  values for Import and Export.
\par \pard 
\par The axis switch settings are set through a selection display. The default setting is for direct association of equivalent axes, i.e. x with x etc. This can be changed should a switch be required.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm89.bmp\}
\par Editing The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Switch\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  settings for Import and Export.
\par \pard 
\par The individual point text strings are stored as part of the template descriptions. Thus they can either be edited through the normal template editor dialogue display on the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  tab or they can be edited from within the Import/Export window via the \i Data / Edit Point Label Strings\plain\fs20  menu option. In both case these settings would need to be saved either with the data file, (by enabling template save to the data file, see settings menu options) or by saving the modified template as a user defined or custom template. Each point can have three associated text strings, the first is for the point position whilst two others are provided to identify local bush axis positions. All text fields are optional and can be set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Not Defined\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  if not required or unknown. A special text description \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 DERIVED\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  is used for some points such as the stub axle point and the strut lower slider axis point. These are not extracted directly from the sub system file but are calculated either in the case of the strut point from the other points or as in the case of the stub axle point, from additional extracted data values. The point strings can also be math\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s functions such as [(P1+P2)/2.0]. The use of a math\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s function is indicated by the use of square brackets [ ] to bound the string. This indicates that the point string should be treated as a math\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s string with reference to other points via their position in the template i.e. P4 is the fourth point in the template. As points are processed in order it is possible to use this sequence to use a math\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s function to define point 5 and then reference point 5 in a latter points definition, say point 8. Note that the point number is position in the template and not the local \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 point number\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  as defined in column 1 of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 settings\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  tab of the template editor. The math\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s function reader is loosely based around Fortran syntax. Key intrinsic functions recognized include, SQRT, SIN, COS, TAN, SIND, COSD, TAND, ASIN, ATAN, ACOS, ASIND, ACOSD, ATAND, LOG10, SINH, COSH, TANH, LOG, EXP AND ABS. The standard symbols +, -, * (for multiply), /, **(for power) are used whilst simple round ( ) brackets can be used within the string to force computation sequence.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm90.bmp\}
\par Editing the Text \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Strings\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  through the Template Editor.
\par \pard 
\par From within the Import display three menu items are provided to access the three text fields, \i Data / Edit Point Label Strings, Data / Edit Bush Z-axis Label Strings\plain\fs20  and \i Data / Edit Bush X-Z Plane Label Strings\plain\fs20 . These provide a local means of editing the template settings. 
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm91.bmp\}
\par Editing the point label strings from the import display.
\par \pard 
\par Additional strings are used to identify supplementary model data. They also provide a means by which \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 left\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 right\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  is identified since this may be subject to local language issues. The \i Data / Edit General Label Strings\plain\fs20  menu item displays these current settings. Because they are considered local user settings rather than model specific they are saved as part of the users ini file. 
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm92.bmp\}
\par Changing the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 General\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  Settings Strings.
\par \pard 
\par To import hard points from a sub model first ensure that the relevant point strings and general strings are correct for the current template. Open the import display and use the \i File / Open (sub system) \plain\fs20 to locate and load the required sub system model. The data extraction can be previewed in the lower display section using the \i File / Import Hard Points (Preview)\plain\fs20  menu option.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm93.bmp\}
\par Example Hard Point Import, template type 1.
\par \pard 
\par To populate the current LSA model with the values extracted from the sub-system use the \i File / Import Hard Points.\plain\fs20  If settings have been changed from the default for the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 shift\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 scale\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 switch\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  they are applied in the order \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Shift\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  then \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Scale\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  and then \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Switched\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
\par 
\par The Export function works in the same manner as Import but the order of shift, scale and switch is reversed. 
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Adding a Hard Point to a Model
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The number of hard points in a model is controlled by the appropriate template. Points can be added by modifying the template using the standard template editor, see \i File / Edit Templates\plain\fs20  menu item. Additional points can be added to a model directly through the graphical viewer via the \i Edit / Add Point\plain\fs20  menu items. These added points would not normally be used to modify the overall connectivity but more likely be used to add additional user graphics.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm94.bmp\}
\par Adding a Hard Point to the existing model, add options highlighted.
\par \pard 
\par Points can be added through the menu either to ground (i.e. the body) or to any picked part. When adding to the body the user must provide the new position in global coordinates. A point added to an existing part can be added in absolute coordinates, relative to a point or between two points. When adding points to a part, once the part is picked the display will switch to just show that part and its associated points in a similar manner to the free body display. When in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Part\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  pick mode, the part labels are made visible and the part \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 centre\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  points drawn.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm95.bmp\}
\par Adding a Hard Point via the template editor, .
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Adding Graphics to a Model
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par Graphical elements are stored as part of the template structure and control the visual appearance of a model. The user can add additional graphics elements by direct editing of the template through th e standard template editor, see \i File / Edit Templates\plain\fs20  menu item. Additional graphical elements can be added to a model directly through the graphical viewer via a series of menu items under the \i Graphics / Add\plain\fs20  sub-menu.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm96.bmp\}
\par Adding a Graphical Element to the existing model, add options highlighted.
\par \pard 
\par Each added element is appended to the current template list, thus by adding graphics from the menu the user is modifying the template. To retain these changes users need to ensure they save the modified template either by inclusion into the data file, or by saving the template to a custom or user template file. 
\par 
\par Graphical elements can be picked on screen and deleted if required. Again this will remove them from the current template and permanent changes would need to be saved as indicated above.
\par \pard 
\par The list of available graphical elements is broken down into nine sub sections listed below;
\par 
\par \pard\tx355 \tab Line
\par \tab Cylinder
\par \tab Circle
\par \tab Sphere
\par \tab Facet
\par \tab Plane
\par \tab Distance
\par \tab Components
\par \tab Angle
\par 
\par Each sub section has a number of specific ways of defining the associated primitive.
\par 
\par \b \tab Lines:
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 \plain\fs20\cf1 Pnt-Pnt Line:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Two hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part.
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Vector Line:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Three hard point picks are required, a line is drawn through the first point who\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s direction is set by the vector defined by the second and third picks, points need not be on the same part. The first and second picks can be the same point. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Xvector Line:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. One hard point pick is required, a line is drawn through the picked point in the global X axis direction. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Yvector Line:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. One hard point pick is required, a line is drawn through the picked point in the global Y axis direction. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Zvector Line:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. One hard point pick is required, a line is drawn through the picked point in the global Z axis direction. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
\par \pard\tx355 \tab \tab \cf1 Pnt-Plane-Norm:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. A line is drawn through the selected point in a direction normal to the selected plane. The plane is identified by three point picks. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
\par \tab \tab \cf1 Pnt-UserVector:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. A line is drawn through the selected point in a direction defined by a user vector. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \b \tab Cylinders:
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \plain\fs20\cf1 Pivot:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Pivot graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Two hard point picks are required, both points need not be on the same part.
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Tube:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Tube graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Two hard point picks are required, both points need not be on the same part.
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Vector-Radius-Length:\plain\fs20  Adds a new cylinder graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Drawn through the selected point in a direction defined by the second and third point picks. The radius and length of the cylinder are defined directly.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \b \tab Circles:
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \plain\fs20\cf1 Pnt-Pnt-Pnt:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Three hard point picks are required through which is drawn a circle, both the circle centre and radius are calculated and displayed as part of the graphical display.
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Cntr-Rad-Norm:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Three hard point picks are required. The circle is drawn centered at the first point of a defined radius and who\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s normal is defined by the second and third picks. The first and second picks can be the same point.
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Cntr-Pnt-Plane:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Three hard point picks are required. The circle is drawn centered at the first point and is drawn through the second point, (i.e. defines the radius), in a plane that contains the third picked point. All picked points must be different.
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Normal:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Three hard point picks are required. The circle is drawn through the first point about the defined normal vector. All picked points must be different. The derived circle centre and radius is drawn as part of the graphical element display.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \b \tab Spheres:
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \plain\fs20\cf1 Pnt-Pnt Radius:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Two unique hard point picks are required. The sphere is centered at the first pick and the radius is set by the second pick.
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt Radius:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. One hard point pick is required. The sphere is centered at the pick and given the radius specified by the user.
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Pnt Dia:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Two unique hard point picks are required. The sphere is centered at the mid point of the two picks, the radius being half the distance between them.
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Pnt-Pnt-Pnt:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Four unique hard point picks are required. The sphere is drawn through the selected four points. Four points will define a unique sphere who\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s calculated radius and centre position is identified as part of the drawn graphical element.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \b \tab Facets:
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \plain\fs20\cf1 Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Facet:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Triangular Facet graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Three hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part.
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Facet:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Four noded Facet graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Four unique hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part. Whilst points need not be in a plane, any facet drawn of non-planar nodes is not fully defined.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \b \tab Planes:
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \plain\fs20\cf1 Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Plane:\plain\fs20  Adds a plane graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Three unique hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-X-Y Plane:\plain\fs20  Adds an X-Y plane graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template drawn through the selected pick. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-X-Z Plane:\plain\fs20  Adds an X-Z plane graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template drawn through the selected pick. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Y-Z Plane:\plain\fs20  Adds an Y-Z plane graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template drawn through the selected pick. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-UserVector Plane:\plain\fs20  Adds an plane graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template drawn through the selected pick. The orientation of the plane is controlled by two user defined vectors. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b \tab Distance
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \plain\fs20\cf1 Pnt-Pnt Dist:\plain\fs20  Adds a point to point distance graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The display shows the total distance between the two points.
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Line Dist:\plain\fs20  Adds a point to line distance graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Any three hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The last two picks define the required line. The display shows the total perpendicular distance between the point and the line.
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Line-Line Dist:\plain\fs20  Adds a minimum distance between two lines graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first two picks define one line whilst the last two picks define the other required line. The display shows the minimum normal distance between the two lines as a total distance.
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Plane Dist:\plain\fs20  Adds a points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  distance from a plane as a graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first point is the required point whilst the last three picks define the required plane. The display shows the normal distance between the point and the plane as a total distance.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b \tab Components
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \plain\fs20\cf1 Pnt-Pnt Comps:\plain\fs20  Adds a point to point distance graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The display shows the distance between the two points in its x, y and z components. 
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Line Comps:\plain\fs20  Adds a point to line distance graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Any three hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The last two picks define the required line. The display shows the perpendicular distance between the point and the line in its x, y and z components. 
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Line-Line Comps:\plain\fs20  Adds a minimum distance between two lines graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first two picks define one line whilst the last two picks define the other required line. The display shows the minimum normal distance between the two lines in its x, y and z components.
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Plane Comps:\plain\fs20  Adds a points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  distance from a plane as a graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first point is the required point whilst the last three picks define the required plane. The display shows the normal distance between the point and the plane in its x, y and z components.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \b \tab Angles:
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \plain\fs20\cf1 Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Angle:\plain\fs20  Adds an angle between three points graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Any three hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The middle picks is the point for which the angle is given. The display shows the angle created by the three point picks in degrees. 
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 Individual graphical element types have their own specific data requirements some are unique to each element and others are relevant to each class of element. These settings and values can be edited by picking the relevant element. Hint, hover over the approximate centre of an element and check the status bar prompt to confirm required element will be selected.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm97.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 A \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Pnt-Plane Dist\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  Graphical Element added to a type 1  model.
\par \pard\tx355 \tab 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Free Body Graphical Display
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The free body display mode can be switched on via the \i View / Free Body Diagram\'85 \plain\fs20 pull down menu. When enabled the display changes to show only the selected part and it\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s associated points, graphical elements and forces. In this mode the interface functions exactly as normal, i.e. dynamically viewed, animated, edited etc but only that parts elements are involved. A small selection box is used to control the free body mode enabling the user to select the required corner and part.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm98.bmp\}
\par Setting the Part for Free Body Display.
\par \pard 
\par The free body mode can be cancelled either by un-checking the menu item that was used to enable it, or by closing the free body selection box.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm99.bmp\}
\par Example free body display for a lower wishbone in compliant mode.
\par \pard 
\par 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Kinematic Sum Display
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The kinematic sum display is a means by which the weighted sum of the deviations of selected results when compared to a target value can be displayed. This single value allows a simple metric to be used to compare a change in a particular suspension property effect over a whole range of results.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm100.bmp\}
\par Kinematic Sum Display.
\par \pard 
\par Results that can be included into the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 sum\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  include all graphs results, (visible or otherwise), and all compliance bar graphs. Individual weighting factors can be applied to each selected result. A number of convenience functions are provided to automatically set these weighting values mostly based around the current display axes settings. 
\par 
\par The sum value is the cumulative of all individual deviations from target. In the case of the compliance coefficients these targets are set by selecting each bar chart in turn and defining the required value. In the case of the characteristic graphs, (i.e. toe, camber castor etc.), the target line is the user line set for each graph. The deviation is then the difference between either the single target value (for the compliance coefficients) or the average of the differences of the actual curve from the defined line for a characteristic graph.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm101.bmp\}
\par Example Characteristic Graph, showing its contribution to the sum.
\par \pard 
\par The importance of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Kinematic Sum\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  is that since it can be used by the user to view the impact of a single change on a set of potential compromise results, it can also be used by an optimization routine as indicating the direction of change for achieving an optimum design. This optimization potential is covered in the next section.
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  The Internal Optimizer
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The kinematic sum is used to apply a sensitivity-based optimization to the model. Parameters are defined that have a start value, range and increment. Parameters can be point position, bush stiffness and bush orientation. The Kinematic sum as discussed previously can optionally include any characteristics graph or compliance coefficient.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm102.bmp\}
\par Expanded Optimizer Display, \i View / Details\plain\fs20  option checked.
\par 
\par \pard 
\par The settings for the optimization are editable through a single display. With sections for defining which results to include, weightings to apply and settings for parameters.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm103.bmp\}
\par Optimizer Parameter Summary.
\par \pard 
\par Parameters are applied in reverse sensitivity order, the most sensitive applied last. A sensitivity threshold value is applied such that parameters that do not significantly affect the sum can be automatically screened. As the optimization is proceeding the graphical display is updated and a rolling display shows the changes to the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 sum\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm104.bmp\}
\par Optimizer Rolling Sum Display.
\par \pard 
\par Once the optimizer run has finished the user is asked to confirm acceptance of the changes. Selecting \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 no\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  will return the model to the pre-run condition. User can stop a run early either through manual interjection or through a software defined minimum target value.
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Display Units
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The units used in the display of both the data and the results can be changed from the default settings of Angle - deg, Length \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  mm, Mass - kg and Force - N to other available options. The options are given below for each variable type. A user defined \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 unit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  option is also available for each parameter.
\par 
\par \pard\tx355 \tab Angle:\tab Radian
\par \tab \tab MilliRadian
\par \tab \tab Degree (default)
\par \tab \tab Minutes
\par \tab \tab User-Defined
\par 
\par \tab Length:\tab Meter
\par \tab \tab milliMeter (default)
\par \tab \tab User-Defined
\par 
\par \tab Mass:\tab Kilogram (default)
\par \tab \tab User-Defined
\par 
\par \tab Force:\tab Newton (default)
\par \tab \tab decaNewton
\par \tab \tab User-Defined
\par 
\par It must be remembered that this is a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 viewing\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  option only and data files will always be saved using the original \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 default\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  unit settings. This also applies to the text editor within the program since this is merely an editor of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 saved\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  data files.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par The units can be set either from the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 New Model display\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  or directly from the menu items \i View / Change Units\plain\fs20 . 
\par 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm105.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Opening the units Tool from the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 New model\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  display.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 The settings for each unit includes a scale factor, the number of decimal points (to add or remove compared to the default settings) and the label.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm106.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Changing the units display.
\par \pard\qc\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 These view unit settings are saved as part of the users configuration \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 ini\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  file and are not saved with the data file. Whilst the units can be changed at any time, it should not be carried out when you have a data display window open as this could lead to incorrect data unit conversions. 
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Modal Analysis
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par Modal analysis can be applied to any compliant model. To correctly predict modal frequencies and shapes the part masses and bush stiffness\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  must be defined. The modal analysis calculates as many natural frequencies as there are degrees of freedom in the model. Frequencies are sorted into ascending order and the user can select an individual mode to view/animate. Mode shapes can be selected and animated via the \i View / Set Display Mode Tool\plain\fs20 .
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm107.bmp\}
\par Setting the display mode to Mode Shape \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  8th mode Selected.
\par \pard 
\par The required mode shape can either be set via the selection box to the right of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 mode shape\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  toggle or through the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Modal Frequencies\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  results plot. To display the Modal Frequencies results plot select \i Results / Modal Analysis Display\plain\fs20 .
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm108.bmp\}
\par Modal Frequencies Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  8th mode Selected.
\par 
\par \pard The selected modal shape is also shown drawn or animated in the main 3d view with an associated scalar. This allows the user to view each mode shape in turn.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm109.bmp\}
\par Modal Frequencies Main View \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  5th mode Selected.
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Forced-Damped Analysis
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The Forced damped analysis takes a compliant modal and calculates the amplitudes of all points in the model over a specified frequency range under the current force set. Defining the required force set is important as this controls which natural modes will be excited. The force can optionally include the spring force(s). Damping is added to the model for both the damper elements and the bushes. Bush damping is defined by a loss angle setting whilst the damper elements have their damping directly defined.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm110.bmp\}
\par Changing the View to Forced Damped \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  15.4 Hz selected
\par \pard 
\par The forced-damped display can be for any specified frequency. This can be set either via the slider in the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 set display mode\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  dialogue box or directly in the value entry. In addition the response of the system through a complete frequency sweep can be displayed, \i Results / Forced-Damped Speed Sweep Display\plain\fs20 . The displayed graph can be control to set the required range and amplitude scales. Because this speed sweep is relatively time consuming to perform, (in Shark terms at least), this speed sweep display is only updated when first opened or when the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 refresh\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  option is selected.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm111.bmp\}
\par Forced-Damped Speed Sweep Display \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  15.4 Hz point shown
\par \pard 
\par As with the modal analysis the forced-damped response for the current frequency can be viewed/animated in the main window with a defined scaler.
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Creating a Full Axle Model
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The simplest type of template is for an independent suspension based on a single corner, (one wheel). For some suspension types such as rigid axles you will always need to model both wheels in the initial template. Whilst with independent suspensions you have the option to make them single wheel or double wheel template. If it is required to analyze the impact of suspension parts that connect both corners together such as steering rack, anti-roll bar and sub-frames then a full axle model would be required.
\par \pard 
\par To convert a corner template to a full axle you can either edit the template directly through the template editor, \i File / Edit Templates \plain\fs20 or use the convenience data menu options. If you edit the template directly you will need to duplicate all the existing points changing the default Y co-ordinate to be the mirror of its partner, tag the specific points such as upper ball joint(2) and set the point symmetry options. Far simpler is to use the convenience function \i Edit / Convert Corner to Axle Model\plain\fs20  which completes all this for you.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm112.bmp\}
\par Default Template 1 converted to full axle model
\par \pard 
\par Once converted to a full axle template you can now add features such as the compliant rack and anti-roll bar. Further convenience functions are available to simplify these tasks. The compliant rack add menu \i Edit / Add Two Part Rack to Model\plain\fs20  option requires the user to identify which part the roll-bar drop link should be attached to. Once selected the user is prompted for a point position and then all necessary modifications are made to the template. It should be remembered that this template modification needs to be saved, either as a custom template, user template or saved with the data file (\i Setup / Include User Templates In Data Files).
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm113.bmp\}
\par Anti-roll Bar Added to Full axle version of Default Template 1.
\par \pard 
\par To add a compliant rack to the template use \i Edit / Add two Part Rack to Model\plain\fs20 , this just requires both the left and right steering attachment points have been tagged in the template so that the rack can be correctly included into the model.
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  User Defined Custom Controls
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par Users who wish to build their own custom displays can do so through the \i Window / Open New Custom Control Display\plain\fs20  menu option. Dialogue boxes created in this way can be distributed to other users as saved specification files. Individual user settings are saved as part of the ini file such that they are available for repeat use.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm114.bmp\}
\par Example custom template dialogue box- showing data sliders
\par \pard 
\par These custom displays are completely editable not only in terms of widget content but also the associated commands, data values and results. Thus a custom display can be used to group a set of specific data variables together into a single window with some specific menu commands. Alternatively they may provide a collection of results graphs for standard results viewing.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm115.bmp\}
\par Example custom template dialogue box - showing data and results options
\par \pard 
\par To create your own custom display, select the \i Window / Open New Custom control Display\plain\fs20  menu option. This will display a new empty display, (save for simple text widgets). To change the display, select the 'Edit' option. You can modify, add and delete widgets from the display.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm116.bmp\}
\par New display in 'edit' mode
\par \pard 
\par To delete an existing widget(s) select the widget with the mouse and 'delete'. The right mouse menu has a number of functions that allow you to align widgets to improve appearance.
\par 
\par Widget types that can be added include, Buttons, Toggles, Sliders, Text Display/Entries, Value Display/Entries, Icon Buttons, Gauges, SDF Graphs, Bar charts and Bars. Each has a set of properties that can be edited via the 'Properties' option. The properties specific to the dialogue box can be edited through the right mouse menu.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm117.bmp\}
\par Properties display for dialogue box
\par \pard 
\par Users can save the settings for a particular display such that it can be shared with other users. Custom control settings are automatically include in a users ini file for future use. To save it for use by other users, in 'Edit' mode select the save option and define the required file name and location. Users can then use the 'load' option to use this file to create their own copy of it. A custom control display is not lost by simply closing the display, its settings are saved and is available from the list of displays at any time in the future. To permanently remove a custom display from the list you must use the 'WinDelete' option whilst in 'Edit' mode.
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Getting Started \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Start-up Steps
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par Starting the program can be considered to consist of the following steps;
\par 
\par 1) Start the executable, locate either from the \b Start\plain\fs20  menu, (normally \i Start / Programs / Lotus Engineering Software / Lotus Suspension Analysis\plain\fs20 ), or through explorer. Browse to the installed folder (normally c:\'5clesoft), and run the suspension analysis executable \b shark.exe.\plain\fs20 
\par 
\par 2) Select the solution module required from either 2D or 3D, and the required articulation type. The default is to open in the 3D module under bump/rebound articulation.
\par \pard 
\par 3) Set the required display units.
\par 
\par 4) Optionally load any required user defined templates.
\par 
\par 5) Enter the required suspension data, either from an existing saved file or through the new file options. 
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm118.bmp\}
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Getting Started \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Program Start-up
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par During program start-up a number of system checks are performed. The users ini file is searched for and if found, loaded to overwrite the internal defaults. User line data bases if referenced are also checked for and added to the relevant menus.
\par 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Getting Started \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Start-up Errors
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par During program start-up the searching for a subsequent loading of the \uldb users \plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'91\f1 ini\plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1  file\plain\fs20  can in exceptional circumstances, results in an error message. This implies a corrupt ini file possibly due to a previous partial save or inappropriate editing, (the ini file should not be edited by hand).
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm119.bmp\}
\par Error message ini file read failure
\par \pard 
\par Selecting okay will continue to start the program, but with only a partial reading of the ini file, (partial up to the point of read error). Partial reading of the ini file may cause problems which may require the program to be closed and restarted. If the problems persists, (as it may, since the invalid settings will be written back into ini file when the program has a normal exit), the only option may be to delete the ini file, see \uldb Defaults\plain\fs20 .
\par 
\par 
\par Whilst strictly not a start-up error, the other possible start-up event that may occur is the detection of a previous runs temporary scratch file. This is interpreted as a previous run incorrectly shutting down, as these temporary scratch files used for the undo feature, are deleted on normal program exit.
\par \pard 
\par If a scratch file(s) is identified, the user is given the option of recovering the most recent file and thus avoids potential data loss.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm120.bmp\}
\par Data Recovery Message
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Getting Started \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Graphics Frame Types
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The interfaces main \uldb graphics\plain\fs20  display has two alternative drivers. The default device driver is a Windows GDI, (\i View / Graphics Frame Type / Windows GDI),\plain\fs20  which whilst it works with all Hardware options does so at the expense of both speed and capability. The GDI driver is unable to support depth buffered display and hence the view styles \i View / Fill Style / Hidden Line \plain\fs20 and \i View / Fill Style / Depth Buffered (Flat shaded )\plain\fs20  do not function correctly. The alternative device driver is Open GL, (\i View / Graphics Frame Type / Open GL\plain\fs20 ), which is both faster and supports depth buffering/hidden line display types.
\par \pard 
\par Not all hardware is able to use the Open GL device type, typical failures are inability to refresh and lack of correct hidden line display.
\par 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Getting Started \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Window Descriptions
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The application window layout utilizes a Multi Document interface (MDI) style. Where display and graph windows are displayed as children of the main window. The main window has a top menu bar and four toolbars which have optional positions. The graphical display is drawn in a 3D viewing window, whilst individual \uldb graphs\plain\fs20  have separate windows.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm5.bmp\}
\par Example screen shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Overall appearance of application
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Getting Started \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Module Type
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par On program start-up by default the application will go into the 3D module, and in bump/rebound articulation mode. Since the 2D and 3D module data sets are completely separate, change to the required module before starting data entry.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm121.bmp\}
\par Setting the application module \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Toolbar Icons
\par \pard 
\par The menu entry \i Module / Shark \plain\fs20 sub menu can be used to select the required module and articulation type.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm122.bmp\}
\par Setting the application module \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  pull-down menu options
\par \pard 
\par Note that it is possible for the application to detect that a data file being loaded is a 2D or 3D data file and if necessary it will switch to the appropriate module.
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Getting Started \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Data Entry
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par At start-up the main form of data entry to the program is the suspension hard points coordinates, (irrespective of module). To load an existing data file use the \i File  / Open...\plain\fs20  menu item, (note that the five most recently opened files are appended to the \i File\plain\fs20  menu). To create a new model select the \i File / New\plain\fs20  menu item set the required suspension end(s) to model and the required \uldb suspension type\plain\fs20 . All new models created in this way will be fully populated with default values, not only for the suspension hard points but also all other data requirements, (i.e. tyre sizes).
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm123.bmp\}
\par Creating a new model
\par \pard 
\par These default values can now be edited whilst still within the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 new model\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  dialogue box by selecting the relevant icon. Alternatively the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Done\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  option can be selected to view the new model and the main \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Edit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  functions used to revise the data.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm124.bmp\}
\par Editing the default co-ordinates data
\par \pard 
\par It is possible to have an asymmetric model. If this is required then the check box at the top of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 new model\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  dialogue should be un-selected. 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Getting Started \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Exiting the Program
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The close the program select the \i File / Exit\plain\fs20  menu item, and then confirm the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 okay to exit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  prompt. Alternative methods to close the application include the conventional \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 X\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  from the windows top right corner, Alt+F4 or close from the main windows top left menu. In addition the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 esc\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  key will close the application, (subject to accepting the prompt).
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm125.bmp\}
\par Okay to exit prompt
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - File
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \cf1 File / New:\plain\fs20  Creates a new model. Opens the new model dialogue box to create a new suspension model. This is also the route to adding a new front or rear suspension to the current model file, i.e. convert a single axle model into a full vehicle model.
\par 
\par \cf1 File / Open:\plain\fs20  Opens the standard Windows file browser to locate the required existing file to load. Note that file open will lose the current model data. The file reader is able to identify the difference between a 2D and 3D data file and will if necessary change module.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 File / Add End from File:\plain\fs20  Opens the standard Windows file browser to locate the required existing file to load the suspension end from. This 3D only option allows the user to add to a single end model the other suspension end from an existing saved file. Only the suspension geometry and compliance properties are loaded from this second file. You cannot use this option if you already have both ends defined. If you have a full vehicle model and want to switch one end to a saved model you must first remove one the required end by using the File / New menu and un-checking the relevant selection box.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 File / Import Hard Points from / Adams Sub System:\plain\fs20  Opens a split screen text editor window that allows the user to load an Adams Sub System model file and extract the hard point geometry directly from it via text recognition strings defined in the template. A preview feature allows the identified Sub System sections to be viewed and the hard point values found.
\par 
\par \cf1 File / Import Hard Points from / User \plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'91\f1 A\plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'92\f1  Format:\plain\fs20  Opens a split screen text editor window that allows the user to load an User specific model file and extract the hard point geometry directly from it via text recognition strings defined in the template. A preview feature allows the identified Sub System sections to be viewed and the hard point values found.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 File / Export Hard Points from / Adams Sub System:\plain\fs20  The reverse of the previous Adams menu item. Opens the same split screen text editor window that allows the user to load an Adams Sub System model file and populate it with the current hard point geometry directly to it via text recognition strings defined in the template. A preview feature allows the modified Sub System to be viewed prior to applying the extraction.
\par 
\par \cf1 File / Export Hard Points from / User \plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'91\f1 A\plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'92\f1  Format:\plain\fs20  The reverse of the previous User A format menu item. Opens the same split screen text editor window that allows the user to load a User specific format model file and populate it with the current hard point geometry directly to it via text recognition strings defined in the template. A preview feature allows the modified Sub System to be viewed prior to applying the extraction.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 File / Save As:\plain\fs20  Opens the standard Windows  file browser to enable the current model to be saved to disc. Browse to the required folder and enter/select the required file name.
\par 
\par \cf1 File / Run Virtual Compliance Test:\plain\fs20  This option provides a data link between the two modules of Lotus Suspension Analysis. The full vehicle handling module requires a number of splines that define the motion of the un-sprung corner masses under a variety of loading and displacement conditions. This data would conventionally come from physical testing of a vehicle on a SKCMS rig. This option allows you to take a Shark full vehicle compliant model and run it through a series of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 virtual\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  tests to produce these splines. This option is only available for models with both front and rear suspensions defined. To produce valid results any anti roll bars and the compliant steering rack option should be included in your model. Whilst this option will still run if these are not added the opposed and parallel tests will not correctly identify the cross car force linking if not added.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 File / Re-Read Default Templates (skip user):\plain\fs20  This menu option will remove all currently defined templates and revert back to the hard coded default template definitions. The user templates file is not loaded even if it exists.
\par 
\par \cf1 File / Re-Read Default+User Templates:\plain\fs20  This menu option remove all currently defined templates and revert back to the hard coded default template definitions. It will then search for and if found re-read the data file that contains the user defined additional 3d kinematic template information. It is defined as additional since the original hard coded templates are always available, (unless overwritten by the external defaults file or a user loaded set).
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 File / Add Custom Templates:\plain\fs20  This option allows a user to read a separate templates file. This file can either add to or overwrite the currently defined templates. This potential to overwrite includes both the hard coded defaults and any loaded from the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 users\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  file. Templates are identified by a position index, thus if you load a template as index 4 it will replace the hard coded default template.
\par 
\par \cf1 File / Save Custom Templates (All):\plain\fs20  This option allows the user to save the complete current template set to an external data file. This data file will then contain the current settings for the hard coded templates any added from the defaults file and any loaded from a custom templates file.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 File / Edit Templates:\plain\fs20  Opens a multi-panel spread sheet display that allows the user to edit and create templates. The user can view the settings of the existing templates, (including hard coded templates) and use the existing templates as a start point for a new template.
\par 
\par \cf1 File / File Text Edit\'85:\plain\fs20  Opens the Data file text editor. This dialogue box can be used to view and edit data files in a purely textual environment. This is an advanced user feature only that is primarily intended for debugging use and is not recommended as a normal working practice. This is primarily because the data file format is not formally declared. 
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 File / Exit:\plain\fs20  Closes the application, subject to confirmation of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 okay to exit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
\par 
\par Appended to the bottom of the \cf1 File\plain\fs20  menu, is a list of the last five (max) opened files.
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Module
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \cf1 Module / Shark / 2D Bump:\plain\fs20  Changes to the 2D module in Bump articulation mode.
\par 
\par \cf1 Module / Shark / 2D Roll:\plain\fs20  Changes to the 2D module in Roll articulation mode.
\par 
\par \cf1 Module / Shark / 3D Bump:\plain\fs20  Changes to the 3D module in Bump articulation mode.
\par 
\par \cf1 Module / Shark / 3D Roll:\plain\fs20  Changes to the 3D module in Roll articulation mode.
\par 
\par \cf1 Module / Shark / 3D Steer:\plain\fs20  Changes to the 3D module in Steer articulation mode.
\par 
\par \cf1 Module / Shark / Combined Motion:\plain\fs20  Changes to the combined Bump and Steer articulation mode. This allows a user defined combination of bump travel with steering lock to be specified for analyzing items such as ball joint travel and wheel envelope
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Module / Raven / STD Interface:\plain\fs20  Changes to the Raven module. This will only be available if you are licensed for this full vehicle-handling module, (licensed separately from Shark).
\par 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - Data
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \cf1 Data / Model Properties:\plain\fs20  Edit model properties via the tree structure display window. Expand required sections to locate individual data fields. Select required data field and edit displayed value.
\par 
\par \cf1 Data / View / Edit Coordinates 2D:\plain\fs20  Displays 2D model coordinates for viewing and editing in a simple single column spread-sheet, (only available in 2D module).
\par 
\par \cf1 Data / View / Edit Coordinates Front:\plain\fs20  Displays 3D model front coordinates for viewing and editing in a multi column spread-sheet, (only available in a 3D module with a front axle included).
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Data / View / Edit Coordinates Rear:\plain\fs20  Displays 3D model rear coordinates for viewing and editing in a multi column spread-sheet, (only available in a 3D module with a rear axle included).
\par 
\par \cf1 Data / Parameters:\plain\fs20  Lists the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Parameters\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  data set for viewing and editing. This data set includes the values controlling the articulation limits, overall vehicle properties such as wheelbase, C of G height, brake split, drive split and brake type.
\par 
\par \cf1 Data / Raven Conv. Parameters:\plain\fs20  Lists the static values used when populating the virtual SKCMS data file. These single values are not calculated as part of the test nor are they part of the Shark data file, hence these editable default values are used.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Data / Raven Corner Parameters:\plain\fs20  Lists the corner values used when populating the virtual SKCMS data file. These corner values are not calculated as part of the test nor are they part of the Shark data file, hence these editable default values are used.
\par 
\par \cf1 Data / Body Type:\plain\fs20  Defines the body graphics used in the 3D display. Options currently limited to the internal options or none. Envisaged expanding to include user defined body sets. Current options include, none, Saloon, Open sports, Old Single Seater, Single Seater, Utility, Super Saloon, Minivan and user defined. Select the required option. Visibility controlled by separate visibility switch.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Data / Edit User Body Data:\plain\fs20  For the user defined body option this menu is enabled to allow direct editing of the lines and facets used to define the body. This allows existing default types to be modified and/or import of STL files to represent the body.
\par 
\par \cf1 Data / Tyre Sizes:\plain\fs20  Lists the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Tyres\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  data set for viewing and editing. In kinematic mode this lists the rolling radius for the front and rear axles, together with the width. The tyre width value is purely for graphical visualization, it does not alter the analysis results. When in compliant solver mode two additional values are listed, these being the tyre vertical stiffness settings.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Data / Steering Type:\plain\fs20  For front suspensions this defines if the steering mechanism is a rack or a steering box. A steering box system requires additional hard points to be defined. When first changing a model from rack to steering box, the application will prompt for the coordinates of the steering box.
\par 
\par \cf1 Data / Edit Box Coords:\plain\fs20  Only enabled when steering type is set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 steering box\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . This displays the current steering box hard points coordinates in a simple spread-sheet display.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Data / Titles:\plain\fs20  Lists the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Titles\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  data set for viewing and editing. The titles have no visual impact within the interface merely act as text labels within the data file. Little used feature of limited use included for backwards compatibility.
\par 
\par \cf1 Data / Compliance Data / Bush Properties (All):\plain\fs20  Opens the \uldb Bush data\plain\fs20  display section. All joints can be edited from this display both in terms of their kinematic coordinates and their compliant properties. The compliant bush properties include the definition of the bush\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s local coordinate system as well as the bush stiffness properties.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Data / Compliance Data / Bush Properties (Stiffness):\plain\fs20  Opens the \uldb bush stiffness\plain\fs20  display window. It consists of a series of sliders that allows the selected bushes individual stiffness properties to be changed via sliders updating both the calculations and the displayed images simultaneously.
\par 
\par \cf1 Data / Compliance Data / Spring Properties:\plain\fs20  Lists the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Spring\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  data set for viewing and editing. The spring properties control the spring force applied to the compliant model through defining the free length, fitted length and linear rate. Note that the visual appearance of the spring is set under the \cf1 Graphics / Enhanced Sizes\cf2  section.
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \cf1 Data / Compliance Data / Damper Properties:\plain\fs20  Lists the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Damper\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  data values for viewing and editing. This lists the Damper rate used for the front and rear dampers. Note that damper1 would be that normally used for the single damper in a corner model. Damper2 would be that used either for a second damper in a corner model or the damper for the second corner in a full axle model. Note that Individual damper properties can be altered by selecting them via the 3d view whilst in edit mode.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm126.bmp\}
\par Damper Properties
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Data / Compliance Data / Tyre Properties:\plain\fs20  Lists the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Tyres\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  data set for viewing and editing. This lists the rolling radius for the front and rear axles, together with the width. The tyre width value is purely for graphical visualization, it does not alter the analysis results, also given is the tyre vertical stiffness values.
\par 
\par \cf1 Data / Compliance Data / External Forces:\plain\fs20  Opens the \uldb external force\plain\fs20  display window. This enables all external force data sets to be edited. Properties include magnitude, part attachment, orientation by \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 head\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tail\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  definition and each force/sets on/off setting.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Data / Compliance Data / Roll Bar Properties:\plain\fs20  Lists the roll bar properties for front and rear suspensions, used in the compliant model if a roll bar has been included. Properties are for the roll bar rate in terms of N.mm/Rad.
\par 
\par \cf1 Data / Compliance Data / General Data:\plain\fs20  Displays the values used for default stiffnesses. The first is the singularity stiffness required by the solver for parts such as tie rods that mathematically have a degree of freedom, and secondly the stiffness used for \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 rigid\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  ball joint. Mathematically the ball joints are not treated as rigid but bushes with very high stiffness in all three translation directions.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Data / Mass Data / C of G Properties:\plain\fs20  Displays the defined Mass properties of the current model. The mass properties specify the C of G values for each part in terms of magnitude, position and orientation. Its layout/requirements are similar to those used for the definition of bush stiffnesses. 
\par 
\par \cf1 Data / Coordinates / Save:\plain\fs20  Saves the current suspension hard points to a temporary store, given a unique label for possible later retrieval. This temporary store only exists whilst the application is open such that all saved coordinate sets are lost when the application is closed. Any number of sets can be stored.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Data / Coordinates / Recall Saved:\plain\fs20  Recalls a saved hard point sets, replacing the current values with those in the temporary store. Saved sets identified by their label.
\par 
\par \cf1 Data / Coordinates / Delete Saved:\plain\fs20  Deletes a saved hard points set from the temporary store. Only valid use is the simplifying of the displayed options through reduced menu list.
\par 
\par \cf1 Data / Coordinates / Delete All:\plain\fs20  Deletes all saved hard point sets from the temporary store. Quicker than deleting one at a time if looking to start the storing from scratch.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Data / Set Static Angles\'85:\plain\fs20  Opens a simple data entry window that allows the user to set the static camber and toe angles directly. By defining the angles the stub axle points position is modified to obtain the required angles. The co-ordinates of the wheel centre are left unaltered.
\par 
\par \cf1 Data / Set/Edit Combined Motion Profile\'85:\plain\fs20  Opens a dialogue window for the display and editing of the combined bump/rebound and steering envelope. This profile is used for identifying limits of ball joint articulations and future uses will include wheel envelopes.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Data / Use Extended Bump Travel:\plain\fs20  Enables the extended bump/rebound travel option. If unchecked the program solves at even increments of bump travel as specified by the increment value within the defined limits. When checked the solver runs through a specific prescribed list of bump positions. Note that -ve is rebound +ve is bump. The individual values are set through the following menu option.
\par 
\par \cf1 Data / Edit Extended Bump Travel\'85:\plain\fs20  Opens a data list dialogue box to display/edit the extended bump travel data. These values are only used when the above option is checked. Each bump position can be given a label. This label is used within graph x-y listing for recognition by appearing on the status bar when 'hovering' over a plotted point.
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - Edit
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \cf1 Edit / Undo (Ctrl+Z):\plain\fs20  \uldb Edit undo\plain\fs20  provides a function that after a number of changes to the suspension hard points coordinates, it is possible to step back through the changes undoing them step by step. This menu can be used or often more conveniently by using the equivalent short cut key strokes \b Ctrl+Z\plain\fs20 . If this menu is not available then no edit events are left in the buffer to undo.
\par 
\par \cf1 Edit / Redo (Ctrl+Y):\plain\fs20  provides a function that after a number of undo changes to the suspension hard points coordinates, it is possible to reapply the the changes that have been undone. This menu can be used or often more conveniently by using the equivalent short cut key strokes \b Ctrl+Y\plain\fs20 . If this menu is not available then no edit events are left in the buffer to redo.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Edit / Modify Mode:\plain\fs20  Sets the \uldb data edit\plain\fs20  mode as either Edit, Joggle or Drag. More normal to use equivalent convenience \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 File\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  toolbar icons.
\par 
\par \cf1 Edit / Change Mode:\plain\fs20  Sets the \uldb change mode\plain\fs20  as either \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Change Part Lengths\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Retain Part Lengths\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . The default \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 change\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode is to change the lengths and relationships between points on a part as a hard point is modified. The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Retain Part Lengths\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  option restricts the pick-able points to just those that are connected to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 ground\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  but retains the defined part lengths as a point is modified.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Edit / All Settings (Ctrl+S):\plain\fs20  Opens a single display window that allows a single point of access to a large number of the graphical, graph and setup settings. This consolidated display supplements the existing individual menu structure to provide quicker overall control of the display.
\par 
\par \cf1 Edit / Add Point / to Ground, Abs Position\'85:\plain\fs20  Adds a new point to the current template. If both front and rear ends are in the model and displayed the user is prompted to identify to which end the point should be added. A new point is added to the template and attached to the ground. The user is then presented with the current properties for editing.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Edit / Add Point / to Ground, Rel to Point Pos\plain\fs20  Adds a new point to the current template. If both front and rear ends are in the model and displayed the user is prompted to identify to which end the point should be added. Only the points associated with the ground are made visible for suitable selection. The user must select a point on the part relative to which the new point is defined.
\par 
\par \cf1 Edit / Add Point / to Ground, Between Points\plain\fs20  Adds a new point to the current template. If both front and rear ends are in the model and displayed the user is prompted to identify to which end the point should be added. Only the points associated with the ground are made visible for suitable selection. The user must select two points on the part between which is added the new point.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Edit / Add Point / to Part, Abs Position\'85:\plain\fs20  Adds a new point to the selected part. On selection of this menu the Part labels and notional centres are made visible for suitable selection. Once selected a point is added at the user defined absolute position.
\par 
\par \cf1 Edit / Add Point / to Part, Rel to Point Pos\'85:\plain\fs20  Adds a new point to the selected part. On selection of this menu the Part labels and notional centres are made visible for suitable selection. Once a part has been selected only this part is made visible and the user must select a point on the part relative to which the new point is defined.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Edit / Add Point / to Part, Between Points\'85:\plain\fs20  Adds a new point to the selected part. On selection of this menu the Part labels and notional centres are made visible for suitable selection. Once a part has been selected only this part is made visible and the user must select two points on the part between which is added the new point.
\par 
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Spring 1:\plain\fs20  Provides an interactive \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 picking\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  method of adding a spring to the current model. It requires the user to pick the two spring end points, the order being the end attached to the body followed by the end attached to the suspension. Thus it requires the required point positions to already exist in the model, (use Add Point / to Part and \i Add Point / to Ground\plain\fs20  menu options to do this if they don\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t already exist). This can also be performed by directly editing the template via the template editor. This \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Add\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  changes not only the model but also the underlying template. Thus if the change is to be retained the template must also be saved. Note that if the Spring 1 already exists in the current template you cannot add it again. You must delete it first or change the point association via the template editor.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Spring 2:\plain\fs20  Provides an interactive \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 picking\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  method of adding a spring to the current model. It requires the user to pick the two spring end points, the order being the end attached to the body followed by the end attached to the suspension. Thus it requires the required point positions to already exist in the model, (use Add Point / to Part and \i Add Point / to Ground\plain\fs20  menu options to do this if they don\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t already exist). This can also be performed by directly editing the template via the template editor. This \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Add\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  changes not only the model but also the underlying template. Thus if the change is to be retained the template must also be saved. Note that if the Spring 2 already exists in the current template you cannot add it again. You must delete it first or change the point association via the template editor.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Damper 1:\plain\fs20  Provides an interactive \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 picking\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  method of adding a damper to the current model. It requires the user to pick the two damper end points, the order being the end attached to the body followed by the end attached to the suspension. Thus it requires the required point positions to already exist in the model, (use Add Point / to Part and \i Add Point / to Ground\plain\fs20  menu options to do this if they don\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t already exist). This can also be performed by directly editing the template via the template editor. This \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Add\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  changes not only the model but also the underlying template. Thus if the change is to be retained the template must also be saved. Note that if the Damper 1 already exists in the current template you cannot add it again. You must delete it first or change the point association via the template editor.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Damper 2:\plain\fs20  Provides an interactive \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 picking\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  method of adding a damper to the current model. It requires the user to pick the two damper end points, the order being the end attached to the body followed by the end attached to the suspension. Thus it requires the required point positions to already exist in the model, (use Add Point / to Part and \i Add Point / to Ground\plain\fs20  menu options to do this if they don\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t already exist). This can also be performed by directly editing the template via the template editor. This \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Add\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  changes not only the model but also the underlying template. Thus if the change is to be retained the template must also be saved. Note that if the Damper 2 already exists in the current template you cannot add it again. You must delete it first or change the point association via the template editor.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Part C of Gs / to Part, Abs Pos:\plain\fs20  Provides an interactive means by which a parts C of G may be added to the model, (this can also be done directly through the template editor). The user must identify which part the C of G point is to be applied to by picking from the now visible part labels. The user then specifies its actual location in absolute global co-ordinates.
\par 
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Part C of Gs / to Part, Rel to Point Pos:\plain\fs20  Provides an interactive means by which a parts C of G may be added to the model, (this can also be done directly through the template editor). The user must identify which part the C of G point is to be applied to by picking from the now visible part labels. To define its location the user must then pick a point on this part and specify its location relative to the selected point.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Part C of Gs / to Part, Between Points:\plain\fs20  Provides an interactive means by which a parts C of G may be added to the model, (this can also be done directly through the template editor). The user must identify which part the C of G point is to be applied to by picking from the now visible part labels. To define its location the user must then pick two points on this part the C of G is then positioned midway between these selected points.
\par 
\par \cf1 Edit / Convert Corner to Axle Model:\plain\fs20  In some instances even for an independent suspension it is required to model a complete axle rather than a corner model. This may be because it is required to include a compliant rack, anti roll-bar, sub-frame or any connecting part. This can either be done by hand through the template editor or by using this convenience function. This single click operation will review the current template and then add the necessary parts, point, connections and graphics to produce a full axle template. To retain this modified template either save it with the model file or as a user or custom template.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Edit / Add Two Part Rack to Model:\plain\fs20  This function provides a simple single click method of adding a two-part compliant rack to the template. It can only be applied to a full axle model, as it needs both steering attachment points to have already been defined in the template. This option adds two parts, (the rack cross-link and the rack bush), six new points, (including both connection points and C of G points), four new bushes and associated graphic elements. To retain this modified template either save it with the model file or as a user or custom template.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Edit / Add Roll Bar to Model:\plain\fs20  This function provides a simple method of adding a roll-bar to the current models template. It can only be applied to a full axle model, as it needs to connect to both suspension sides. The type of roll\plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 bar it adds uses two points to ground and drop links from the bar ends to the suspension part. Thus the user must pick the attachment part and define a point on this part for the drop link to attach to. You do not pre-define this connecting point but enter its global position as part of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Add Roll Bar\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  function, (it is automatically mirrored across to the other side). This function adds three new parts, ten new points, seven new bushes and associated graphics. The reason for the odd number of bushes is because the roll bar stiffness is defined through a revolute bush placed such that it joins the two halves of the roll bar. To retain this modified template either save it with the model file or as a user or custom template.
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - View
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \cf1 View / Refresh:\plain\fs20  Updates all graphical displays, both \uldb Graphics\plain\fs20  and \uldb Graphs\plain\fs20 .
\par 
\par \cf1 View / Dynamic Viewing:\plain\fs20  Menu option to switch between \uldb dynamic viewing\plain\fs20  and \uldb edit\plain\fs20  modes. Either by a toggle action or by specific selection..
\par 
\par \cf1 View / Translate View:\plain\fs20  Sets the \uldb dynamic view\plain\fs20  mode to translate. If currently in edit mode this will also cause a change to the dynamic view mode. Translation by left mouse button hold and move.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 View / Scale View:\plain\fs20  Sets the \uldb dynamic view\plain\fs20  mode to scale. If currently in edit mode this will also cause a change to the dynamic view mode. Scale by left mouse button hold and drag vertically.
\par 
\par \cf1 View / Rotate View:\plain\fs20  Sets the \uldb dynamic view\plain\fs20  mode to rotate. If currently in edit mode this will also cause a change to the dynamic view mode. Rotation by left mouse button hold and move.
\par 
\par \cf1 View / Pick View Centre:\plain\fs20  Allows the view centre to be picked. The pick is based on the nearest picked hard point. The current view is translated such that picked point becomes the view centre, no change is made to either the scale or orientation of the view. Subsequent view rotations will be about this new \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 object\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  point. 
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 View / Zoom:\plain\fs20  Pick the area of the display to zoom to fit current window. The zoom function can accommodate either a two press approach to area selection or a single press, hold and drag selection, a simple time delay trap being used to identify which type is being used. The zoomed view will retain the correct aspect ratio, (i.e. no distortion is allowed), and thus the final displayed region will include additional regions at either the top and bottom or both sides.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 View / Autoscale (Ctrl+A):\plain\fs20  Resets the graphical view such that all drawn components appear within the display window. Note that this is only applied to the graphics window and not the \uldb graphs\plain\fs20 .
\par 
\par \cf1 View / Fill Style:\plain\fs20  Sets the fill style to be used in the graphics display. Not all the fill style options are supported by every machine. Two \uldb graphics frame\plain\fs20  driver options are used one of which will not correctly support two of the fill styles. The fill styles available are, Wire Frame, Filled, Hidden Line and Depth Buffered (flat shaded). The later two will not work correctly unless the graphics frame type has been set to OpenGL
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 View / Std Views:\plain\fs20  Three orthogonal views are offered to aid simple planar viewing of the 3D model. The std views are y-z (front view), z-x (side view) and x-y (top view). Equivalent view toolbar icons are also available.
\par 
\par \cf1 View / Saved Views / Save\'85:\plain\fs20  Saves the current 3D view settings to a temporary store, given a unique label for possible later retrieval. This temporary store only exists whilst the application is open such that all saved views are lost when the application is closed. Any number of views can be stored.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 View / Saved Views / Recall Saved:\plain\fs20  Recalls a saved view, replacing the current view with that in the temporary store. Saved views are identified by their labels.
\par 
\par \cf1 View / Saved Views / Delete Saved:\plain\fs20  Deletes a saved view from the temporary store. Only valid use is the simplifying of the displayed options through reduced menu list.
\par 
\par \cf1 View / Saved Views / Delete All:\plain\fs20  Deletes all saved views from the temporary store. Quicker than deleting one at a time if looking to start the storing from scratch.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 View / Set Background Colour\'85:\plain\fs20  Opens a standard colour selection dialog to pick a new colour for the background colour used in the graphics display. Note that graphs have their ow ncolour settings and are not affected by this change.
\par 
\par \cf1 View / Graphics Frame Type:\plain\fs20  Sets the \uldb graphics frame\plain\fs20  device type as either Windows GDI or Open GL. The default device driver is a Windows GDI, (\i View / Graphics Frame Type / Windows GDI),\plain\fs20  which whilst it works with all Hardware options does so at the expense of both speed and capability. The GDI driver is unable to support depth buffered display and hence the view styles \i View / Fill Style / Hidden Line \plain\fs20 and \i View / Fill Style / Depth Buffered (Flat shaded )\plain\fs20  do not function correctly. The alternative device driver is Open GL, (\i View / Graphics Frame Type / Open GL\plain\fs20 ), which is both faster and supports depth buffering/hidden line display types.
\par \pard 
\par Not all hardware is able to use the Open GL device type, typical failures are inability to refresh and lack of correct hidden line display.
\par 
\par \cf1 View / Set Display Mode Tool\'85:\plain\fs20  Opens the display mode tool. This provides a single dialogue box that can be used to control all 3d view display modes. The four available display modes are;
\par 
\par \pard\tx355 \tab Articulation Display
\par \tab Deformed Geometry  (compliance mode only)
\par \tab Mode Shape  (compliance mode only)
\par \tab Forced-Damped  (compliance mode only)
\par 
\par Each of the four display modes can be animated.
\par 
\par The articulation display can be set as one of the following;
\par 
\par \tab Full + Half + Static (normal articulation displacement display)
\par \tab Full + Static (normal articulation displacement display)
\par \tab Static Only (normal articulation displacement display)
\par \tab All Steps (normal articulation displacement display)
\par \pard\tx355             Single Step (define which step from current articulation list)
\par 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm127.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 The Display Mode Tool.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 The compliant deformed geometry is shown for a specified articulation position and for a defined scaler. This scaler is applied to the actual compliant displacements to enable small displacements to be visualized.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 The compliant Mode Shape display is for a selected mode. The modes are identified by number rather than by frequency, (although the frequency value is shown on the 3d view). A scaler is also applied to modal displays to enable small modal displacements to be visualized.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 The Forced-Damped display shown for a specified frequency. A scaler is applied to the amplitudes to enable small displacements to be visualized.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 As an alternative to using the display mode tool, individual menus can be used to set the display mode and associated properties.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Screen Display / Full+Half+Static:\plain\fs20  Sets the display mode to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Articulation Display\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  and will show the suspension at full travel, mid travel and static. The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 travel\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  will be bump/rebound, roll or steer as appropriate to the current analysis mode.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Screen Display / Full+Static:\plain\fs20  Sets the display mode to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Articulation Display\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  and will show the suspension at full travel and static. The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 travel\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  will be bump/rebound, roll or steer as appropriate to the current analysis mode.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Screen Display / Static Only:\plain\fs20  Sets the display mode to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Articulation Display\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  and will show the suspension at static position only.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Screen Display / All Steps:\plain\fs20  Sets the display mode to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Articulation Display\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  and will show the suspension at all calculated travel points. The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 travel\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  will be bump/rebound, roll or steer as appropriate to the current analysis mode.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Screen Display / Single Step:\plain\fs20  Sets the display mode to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Articulation Display\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  and will show the suspension at a specified single travel step. The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 travel\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  will be bump/rebound, roll or steer as appropriate to the current analysis mode. A number greater than the actual available steps will be clipped to the limiting value.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Screen Display / Deformed Geometry:\plain\fs20  Sets the display mode to \uldb \plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'91 Deformed Geometry\plain\f0\fs20 \uldb \'92  showing the suspensions compliant deformation at a specified single travel step. The currently specified scaling factor will be applied to all displacements.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \f1\cf1 View / Screen Display / Mode Shape:\plain\uldb\fs20  Sets the display mode to \plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'91\f1 Mode Shape\plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1  showing the suspensions modal shape for the static position for the currently specified mode number. The currently specified scaling factor will be applied to all modal displacements.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Screen Display / Forced-Damped:\plain\uldb\fs20  Sets the display mode to \plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'91\f1 Forced-Damped\plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1  showing the suspensions forced response for the static position for the currently specified frequency. The defined scaling factor will be applied to all amplitudes.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Single Step Display:\plain\uldb\fs20  Sets the single step position for the \plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'91\f1 Articulation display\plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1  mode when it is set to single step. This can be a number between 0 and \plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'91\f1 n\plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1  where 0 is the static position and \plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'91\f1 n\plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1  is some point through the travel. The more intuitive way to set this is through the \plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'91\f1 Display mode Tool\plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1  as this gives each single step as a labeled list.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Deformed Geometry Scalar:\plain\uldb\fs20  Defines the scalar used in the deformed geometry animation and display. Is only applicable for the compliant solver mode. Scalars are used to exaggerate the calculated compliant displacements, such that the deformations can be viewed on the display.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Deformed Geometry Position:\plain\uldb\fs20  Sets the incremental articulation position for which the deformed geometry will be animated at. Zero is the static ride position. A number greater than the actual available steps will be clipped to the limiting value.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Mode Shape, Scalar:\plain\uldb\fs20  Defines the scalar used in the \plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'91\f1 Mode Shape\plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1  animation and display. Is only applicable for the compliant solver mode. Scalars are used to exaggerate the calculated modal displacements, such that the mode shape can be viewed on the display.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Mode Shape, Mode No.:\plain\uldb\fs20  Sets the mode number for display. Mode numbers are used rather than frequency values, although the associated frequency is shown on the 3d view. The lowest frequency is mode No. 1.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Forced-Damped, Scalar\'85:\plain\uldb\fs20  Defines the scalar used in the forced-damped animation and display. Is only applicable for the compliant solver mode. Scalars are used to exaggerate the calculated forced displacements, such that the deformations can be viewed on the display.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Forced-Damped, Frequency\'85.:\plain\uldb\fs20  Sets the frequency value for display. The frequency can be set anywhere between 0 and 1000 Hz. 
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Animate (On/Off):\plain\uldb\fs20  Switches on animation\plain\fs20 \uldb  of the suspension(s) for the currently defined display mode. All standard viewing and editing functions can still be used whilst the animation is on. The actual display mode, position, articulation type etc are controlled through other menu settings, (see above).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Free Body Diagram:\plain\uldb\fs20  Changes the graphical display to just show the points, forces and graphical elements associated with a single part. The selection menu allows the user to pick for the selected corner any available part.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Change Units:\plain\uldb\fs20  Opens the utility\plain\fs20 \uldb  for setting the Angle, Length, Force and Mass display units. Options are given for each as well as an option to have a user defined unit display.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \plain\b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - Tracking
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \cf1 Tracking / Toggle:\plain\fs20  Not strictly a toggle, but a cycle through the available tracking options. The available tracking options change depending whether the current view is orthogonal or not.
\par 
\par \cf1 Tracking / All:\plain\fs20  Only applicable if in an orthogonal view. \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 All\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  actually means two axis, i.e. all axes in the current orthogonal view.
\par 
\par \cf1 Tracking / X:\plain\fs20  Changes the tracking direction to the x-axis. If the selection is not valid, for instance if in the y-z orthogonal view, then this selection is ignored.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Tracking / Y:\plain\fs20  Changes the tracking direction to the y-axis. If the selection is not valid, for instance if in the x-z orthogonal view, then this selection is ignored.
\par 
\par \cf1 Tracking / Z:\plain\fs20  Changes the tracking direction to the z-axis. If the selection is not valid, for instance if in the x-y orthogonal view, then this selection is ignored.
\par 
\par \cf1 Tracking / Visible:\plain\fs20  Sets the visibility of the tracking lines. Note that tracking lines are only visible when in dynamic view mode.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Tracking / Length:\plain\fs20  Tracking lines are drawn on the display to a fixed length. The size of this graphical length can be changed from the default value through the opened edit box.
\par 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - Graphics
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Point Nos:\plain\fs20  Toggles the visibility of the template point numbers on the graphical display. The size and colour is user definable. All settings are saved to the ini file.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Point Labels:\plain\fs20  Toggles the visibility of the template point labels on the graphical display. The size and colour is user definable. All settings are saved to the ini file.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Point Limits / Visible:\plain\fs20  Toggles the visibility of the \uldb Limit\plain\fs20  boxes. If this turns the visibility to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  it will also if necessary set the Use to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , i.e. the limit boxes can only be in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 use\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  if visible. Toggling the visibility to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  does not make them in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 use\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , i.e. limit boxes can be visible but not in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 use\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . The in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 use\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  setting is controlled by the next menu item.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Point Limits / Use:\plain\fs20  Toggles the point \uldb limit\plain\fs20  boxes \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 use\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  setting. When in use they limit the joggling or dragging of hard points to within the limited region. Limit boxes are also used for tolerance analysis.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Point Values:\plain\fs20  Toggles the visibility of the x,y and z coordinates for the suspension hard points. When \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  the static coordinates are drawn adjacent to each hard point.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Part Nos:\plain\fs20  Toggles the visibility of the template part numbers. When \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  the template part numbers are drawn at the geometric centre of each part.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Part Labels:\plain\fs20  Toggles the visibility of the template part labels. When \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  the template part labels are drawn adjacent to the geometric centre of each part.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Part C of G Visibility / C of G Marker:\plain\fs20  Toggles the visibility of the part C of G markers. Part C of G\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s can only be drawn when in compliant mode. Part C of G markers are drawn as green and black quadrant style images similar to the body C of G marker.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Part C of G Visibility / C of G Axes Points:\plain\fs20  Toggles the visibility of the part C of G axis points. Part C of G\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s can only be drawn when in compliant mode. Part C of G axis points can be picked and dragged as well as edited to re-define the C of G axes. C of G axes are used to orientate local mass properties.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Part C of G Visibility / C of G Local Axes:\plain\fs20  Toggles the visibility of the part C of G local axes. These graphic axes show the current local axes as defined by the local axis points. Part mass properties are defined relative to these local axes.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Enhanced Visibility:\plain\fs20  Controls the visibility of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 enhanced\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  graphics items. Options are given to switch individual graphic types on and off, Toggle all enhanced graphic types, set them all to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  or set them all to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . For the purpose of this menu the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Enhanced\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  graphics items are, Spring, Damper, Wheel, Bushes, Grid and Body. The other items in this visibility list are not affected by the global \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 enhanced\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  status changes, only they\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 re own individual settings. These are; Triad, Origin Marker, C of G marker, Moving Ground/wheels and Roll axis.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Display Ends:\plain\fs20  Sets the visibility switch for each suspension end. This enables the display to show both, front only or rear only, in a model that contains two axles. Menu has no relevance to a single axle model.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Display Both Sides:\plain\fs20  For visualization enables the viewing of both suspension sides on an axle when the template is defined as a single corner. For full axle templates this switch will have no effect. Menu acts as a toggle, so un-check menu to disable viewing.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Colours:\plain\fs20  Provides control over individual plot element colours. Modified colours settings are stored to the users ini file. The elements that can be defined via this menu include; Static Links, Incremental Links, Static Points, Incremental Points, Picked Points, Static Roll Centre Position, Incremental Roll Centre Position, 2D Axis Lines, 3D Drag Lines, Triad, Static 2D Construction Lines, Incremental 2D Construction Lines, Limit Lines (on), Limit lines (off), Point Values and Point Nos.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Colours / Set to Defaults:\plain\fs20  Single menu selection to set all relevant graphics element colours back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Enhanced Colours:\plain\fs20  Provides control over individual Enhanced plot element colours. Modified colour settings are stored to the users ini file. The elements that can be defined via this menu include; Static Spring, Incremental Spring, Static Damper, Incremental Damper, Static Wheel, Incremental Wheel, Wheel Fill, Static Bushes, Incremental Bushes, Grid, Static Body, Incremental Body and Body Fill.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Enhanced Colours / Set to Defaults:\plain\fs20  Single menu selection to set all relevant enhanced graphics element colours back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Enhanced Sizes / Edit:\plain\fs20  Displays the Enhanced graphics element sizes for viewing and editing. Changes are stored to the users ini file. Properties that can be edited include; Spring Diameter, No of Spring Coils, Lower Damper Tube Diameter, Upper Damper Tube diameter, Damper No. of Facets, Pivot Diameter, Pivot No. of Facets, Tyre No. of Facets, Tyre Diameter Shoulder ratio, Tyre Width Shoulder Ratio, 3D Tracking Line Length, Joggle Symbol Size, C of G Symbol Size and Ground Plane Grid Size.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Enhanced Sizes / Set to Defaults:\plain\fs20  Single menu selection to set all relevant enhanced graphics element sizes back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Label Sizes / Edit:\plain\fs20  Displays the current Label sizes for viewing and editing. Changes are stored to the user ini file. Sizes that can be changed are the hard point values size and the hard point number size.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Label Sizes / Set to Defaults:\plain\fs20  Single menu selection to set all relevant label sizes back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Compliance Colours:\plain\fs20  Provides control over individual compliance plot element colours. Modified colour settings are stored to the users ini file. The compliance elements that can be defined via this menu include; Ball Joint (Rigid), Bush (Compliant), Tyre Spring, External Force and Calculated Force.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Compliance Colours / Set to Defaults:\plain\fs20  Single menu selection to set all relevant compliance graphics element colours back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Compliance Sizes / Edit:\plain\fs20  Displays the compliance graphics element sizes for viewing and editing. Changes are stored to the users ini file. Properties that can be edited include; Ball Joint Diameter, Ball Joint Circumferential Complexity, Ball Joint Height Complexity, Bush Radius, Bush Length, Bush Circumferential Complexity, Bush Height Complexity, Bush Axis Length, Tyre Spring Diameter, External Force Head, External Force Fixed Length and External/Internal Force Scaled Length.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Compliance Sizes / Set to Defaults:\plain\fs20  Single menu selection to set all relevant compliance graphics element sizes back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Compliance Visibility:\plain\fs20  Controls the visibility of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 complaint\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  graphics items. Options are given to switch individual graphic types on and off. For the purpose of this menu the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Compliant\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  graphics items are, Ball Joints, Bushes, Tyre Spring, Bush Axis points, Bush Local Axis, External Forces, External Force Axis, Calculated Forces and Calculated Force Values.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Compliance Visibility / External Force Type:\plain\fs20  Two types of compliant external force display are available. Either a Fixed length arrow that does not change with its magnitude or a scaled force vector whose magnitude is multiplied by a graphical length scalar.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Copy to Clipboard:\plain\fs20  Copies the current graphical display to the Windows clipboard such that it can be pasted into other applications.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Save to File:\plain\fs20  Saves the graphics display to a file. Three file formats are supported, bmp, jpg and png.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / AVI File Writer\'85:\plain\fs20  Opens the AVI file write dialogue. This provides a set of simple to use methods for creating AVI files. Users can create an AVI based on the currently defined displacement, animating over the defined range. Or creating an animation sequence from a series of individual screen shots. The AVI file can be for the full graphics screen or a selected portion. No compression is currently used so whilst file sizes are larger, the issue over LCD projectors being unable to show due to unsupported compression is avoided.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Line / Pnt-Pnt Line:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Two hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Line / Pnt-Vector Line:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Three hard point picks are required, a line is drawn through the first point who\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s direction is set by the vector defined by the second and third picks, points need not be on the same part. The first and second picks can be the same point. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Line / Pnt-Xvector Line:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. One hard point pick is required, a line is drawn through the picked point in the global X axis direction. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Line / Pnt-Yvector Line:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. One hard point pick is required, a line is drawn through the picked point in the global Y axis direction. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Line / Pnt-Zvector Line:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. One hard point pick is required, a line is drawn through the picked point in the global Z axis direction. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Line / Pnt-Plane-Norm:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. A line is drawn through the selected point in a direction normal to the selected plane. The plane is identified by three point picks. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Line / Pnt-UserVector:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. A line is drawn through the selected point in a direction defined by a user vector. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Cylinder / Pivot:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Pivot graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Two hard point picks are required, both points need not be on the same part.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Cylinder / Tube:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Tube graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Two hard point picks are required, both points need not be on the same part.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Cylinder / Vector-Radius-Length:\plain\fs20  Adds a new cylinder graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Drawn through the selected point in a direction defined by the second and third point picks. The radius and length of the cylinder are defined directly.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Circle / Pnt-Pnt-Pnt:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Three hard point picks are required through which is drawn a circle, both the circle centre and radius are calculated and displayed as part of the graphical display.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Circle / Cntr-Rad-Norm:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Three hard point picks are required. The circle is drawn centered at the first point of a defined radius and who\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s normal is defined by the second and third picks. The first and second picks can be the same point.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Circle / Cntr-Pnt-Plane:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Three hard point picks are required. The circle is drawn centered at the first point and is drawn through the second point, (i.e. defines the radius), in a plane that contains the third picked point. All picked points must be different.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Circle / Pnt-Normal:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Three hard point picks are required. The circle is drawn through the first point about the defined normal vector. All picked points must be different. The derived circle centre and radius is drawn as part of the graphical element display.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Sphere / Pnt-Pnt Radius:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Two unique hard point picks are required. The sphere is centered at the first pick and the radius is set by the second pick.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Sphere / Pnt Radius:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. One hard point pick is required. The sphere is centered at the pick and given the radius specified by the user.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Sphere / Pnt-Pnt Dia:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Two unique hard point picks are required. The sphere is centered at the mid point of the two picks, the radius being half the distance between them.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Sphere / Pnt-Pnt-Pnt-Pnt:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Four unique hard point picks are required. The sphere is drawn through the selected four points. Four points will define a unique sphere who\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s calculated radius and centre position is identified as part of the drawn graphical element.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Facet / Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Facet:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Triangular Facet graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Three hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Facet / Pnt-Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Facet:\plain\fs20  Adds a new Four noded Facet graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Four unique hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part. Whilst points need not be in a plane, any facet drawn of non-planar nodes is not fully defined.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Plane / Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Plane:\plain\fs20  Adds a plane graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Three unique hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Plane / Pnt-X-Y Plane:\plain\fs20  Adds an X-Y plane graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template drawn through the selected pick. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Plane / Pnt-X-Z Plane:\plain\fs20  Adds an X-Z plane graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template drawn through the selected pick. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Plane / Pnt-Y-Z Plane:\plain\fs20  Adds an Y-Z plane graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template drawn through the selected pick. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Plane / Pnt-UserVector Plane:\plain\fs20  Adds an plane graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template drawn through the selected pick. The orientation of the plane is controlled by two user defined vectors. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Distance / Pnt-Pnt Dist:\plain\fs20  Adds a point to point distance graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The display shows the total distance between the two points.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Distance / Pnt-Line Dist:\plain\fs20  Adds a point to line distance graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Any three hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The last two picks define the required line. The display shows the total perpendicular distance between the point and the line.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Distance / Line-Line Dist:\plain\fs20  Adds a minimum distance between two lines graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first two picks define one line whilst the last two picks define the other required line. The display shows the minimum normal distance between the two lines as a total distance.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Distance / Pnt-Plane Dist:\plain\fs20  Adds a points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  distance from a plane as a graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first point is the required point whilst the last three picks define the required plane. The display shows the normal distance between the point and the plane as a total distance.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Components / Pnt-Pnt Comps:\plain\fs20  Adds a point to point distance graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The display shows the distance between the two points in its x, y and z components. 
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Components / Pnt-Line Comps:\plain\fs20  Adds a point to line distance graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Any three hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The last two picks define the required line. The display shows the perpendicular distance between the point and the line in its x, y and z components. 
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Components / Line-Line Comps:\plain\fs20  Adds a minimum distance between two lines graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first two picks define one line whilst the last two picks define the other required line. The display shows the minimum normal distance between the two lines in its x, y and z components.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Components / Pnt-Plane Comps:\plain\fs20  Adds a points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  distance from a plane as a graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first point is the required point whilst the last three picks define the required plane. The display shows the normal distance between the point and the plane in its x, y and z components.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add / Angle / Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Angle:\plain\fs20  Adds an angle between three points graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  template. Any three hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The middle picks is the point for which the angle is given. The display shows the angle created by the three point picks in degrees. 
\par 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - Graphs
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \cf1 Graphs / New/Open:\plain\fs20  Opens a new \uldb graph\plain\fs20  window. Each new graph will by default take the use y-variable from the available list. To change the y-variable once opened use the mouse right button menu options.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Visibility:\plain\fs20  Controls the visibility of the graph items. Options are given to switch individual graph items on and off. For the purpose of this menu the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 graph\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  items are; Grid Lines, Deviation Values, Point Symbols, Data Values, Derivative Values, Scope Line, User Line and the Fit Line.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Colours:\plain\fs20  Provides control over individual graph element colours. Modified colour settings are stored to the users ini file. The graph elements that can be defined via this menu include; Grid Lines, Background, Axis Lines and Text, Border Region, Data Line 2D/3D Front, Data Line 3D Rear, Scope Line 2D/3D Front, Scope Line 3D Rear and User Line.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Line Marker:\plain\fs20  Provides control over individual graph line markers. Modified marker settings are saved to the users ini file. The graph lines that marker types can be defined for are; Data Line 2D/3D Front, Data Line 3D Rear, Scope Line 2D/3D Front, Scope Line 3D Rear and User Line. The nine marker types available are Filled Diamond, Triangle, Inverted Triangle, Plus, Cross, Square, Diamond, Circle and Star.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Line Marker / Set to Defaults:\plain\fs20  Single menu selection to set all relevant graph line marker symbols back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Switch x-y Axis:\plain\fs20  Changes the visual appearance of the graphs. Swaps the x and y axes around from the normal, such that the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 y-variable\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  is plotted along the horizontal axis rather than the default vertical position.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Autoscale (All):\plain\fs20  Autoscales all open graphs for both x and y-axes. Includes all visible lines. To autoscale individual graphs use the mouse right button menu item.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Autoscale to Y Increment (All):\plain\fs20  Autoscales all open graphs y-axes. Includes all visible lines. The autoscaling is based on rounding to the nearest whole number of a specific increment. Each graph variable has its own editable increment setting. This autoscale option can also be applied to individual graphs through the right mouse menu of the specific graph.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Scope / On:\plain\fs20  Controls the visibility of the scope line display. It is also controllable via the visibility settings above.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Scope / Store / Exclusive:\plain\fs20  Takes a copy of the current suspension graph results, (includes all variables not just those that are currently displayed). These scope lines are then \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 fixed\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  for comparative on-graph display, (check relevant visibility switch set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 ). The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Exclusive\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  option implies that the results are copied into Scope position 1, and the four other scope positions (2 to 5) are emptied.
\par 
\par \pard \cf1 Graphs / Scope / Store / Shuffle:\plain\fs20  Takes a copy of the current suspension graph results and saves it to scope position 1. All other existing scope data is shuffled down one slot such that one is copied into two etc and any information in position 5 is lost.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Scope / Store / Position n:\plain\fs20  Takes a copy of the current suspension graph results and saves it to scope position n. This will replace any data already stored in this scopes position.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Scope / Clear / All:\plain\fs20  Clears the current scope data from all scope positions 1 to 5. Their isno need to clear the scope before capturing a new set, as Scope Line Store will overwrite any current scope values.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Scope / Clear / Position n:\plain\fs20  Clears the current scope data from the selected position.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Scope / List Deviation From / Position n:\plain\fs20  Identifies which scope position should be used to determine the deviation value between the data and scope lines.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Scope / Scope Position Symbol:\plain\fs20  Sets the visibility of either the scope line symbol or when selected displays a number (1 to 5) rather than the symbol.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Copy Front/2D Data to User:\plain\fs20  Convenience function copies the existing 2D or 3D Front result lines to the Users Lines, (all variables are copied over not just the visible ones).
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Copy Rear Data to User:\plain\fs20  Convenience function copies the existing 3D Rear result lines to the Users Lines, (all variables are copied over not just the visible ones).
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Copy Front/2D Scope to User from / Position n:\plain\fs20  Convenience function copies the existing 2D or 3D Front scope lines to the Users Lines, (all variables are copied over not just the visible ones). You will need to identify which scope position to use from 1 to 5.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Copy Rear Scope to User from / Position n:\plain\fs20  Convenience function copies the existing 3D Rear scope lines to the Users Lines, (all variables are copied over not just the visible ones). You will need to identify which scope position to use from 1 to 5.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Clear Current User Store:\plain\fs20  Clears all user defined line data, (all variables are removed not just those currently visible on open graphs)
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Manage User Lines / Create New DataSet\'85:\plain\fs20  Multiple \uldb user line\plain\fs20  sets can be managed through the use of User Line data sets. This menu item creates a new data set. Browse for the required folder location and define file name, default extension .dbs. On creation no user line sets are added to the new dataset.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Manage User Lines / Include DataSet\'85:\plain\fs20  Adds an existing \uldb user line\plain\fs20  dataset to the search list. The search list is stored to the users ini file. The search list provides direct access to any stored user line sets that have been added to these DataSets.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Manage User Lines / Remove DataSet:\plain\fs20  removes the selected \uldb user line\plain\fs20  data set from the search list.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Manage User Lines / Load From:\plain\fs20  Provides a list of found \uldb user line\plain\fs20  sets that can be loaded from the data sets. The loaded user line data will replace any current values.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Manage User Lines / Add Current to:\plain\fs20  Option to save the current \uldb user line\plain\fs20  data to one of the current datasets on the search list.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Manage User Lines / Delete From:\plain\fs20  Option to remove a stored \uldb user line\plain\fs20  set from one of the current datasets on the search list. User line sets a re identified by the dataset label and line set label.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Marker/Text Sizes / Edit Sizes:\plain\fs20  Displays the \uldb graph\plain\fs20  marker and text sizes for viewing and editing. Changes are stored to the users ini file. Properties that can be edited include; Data Line Marker Size, Scope Line Marker Size, User Line Marker Size, Graph Data Values Text Size, Compliance Title Text Size, Compliance Label Text Size and Compliance Values Text Size.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Marker/Text Sizes / Set to Defaults:\plain\fs20  Single menu selection to set all relevant graph marker and text sizes back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.
\par 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Decimal Points Display / Edit Settings:\plain\fs20  Displays the graph decimal points display for viewing and editing. Changes are stored to the users ini file. Properties that can be edited include; X-Data Listing, Y-Data Listing, Derivative Data Listing, Scope Deviation, User Deviation, X-Axis Label, Y-Axis Label and Compliance Graph Values.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Graphs / Decimal Points Display / Set to Defaults:\plain\fs20  Single menu selection to set all relevant graph decimal points displays back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.
\par 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - Solve
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \cf1 Solve / Motion:\plain\fs20  Sets the ground plane solution type as either moving ground plane or moving body. It is only applicable to the bump articulation type.
\par 
\par \cf1 Solve / 2D Fix Option:\plain\fs20  For the \uldb 2D module\plain\fs20  a number of alternative solution techniques can be employed. This sets which hard point, if any, is \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 freed\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  off to match the target characteristics.
\par 
\par \cf1 Solve / 3D Compliance:\plain\fs20  Turns on the \uldb compliant\plain\fs20  solver. Compliant solutions add elastic bushes and external force effects on to the incremental kinematic solution.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Solve / External Forces:\plain\fs20  For compliance analysis, external forces can be optionally included. Toggles through on/off with this menu option or use the equivalent toolbar icon.
\par 
\par \cf1 Solve / Suspension Spring Force:\plain\fs20  For compliance analysis, the suspension spring force can be optionally included. Toggles through on/off with this menu option.
\par 
\par \cf1 Solve / Suspension Roll Bar Force:\plain\fs20  For compliance analysis, the suspension roll bar force (if modeled) can be optionally included. Toggles through on/off with this menu option.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Solve / Rack Cross-Link Force:\plain\fs20  For compliance analysis, the force at the rack track rod ends can optionally be fed across from one suspension corner (if modeled). Toggles through on/off with this menu option.
\par 
\par \cf1 Solve / Bush Rotation Pre-loads:\plain\fs20  For compliance analysis, the implied pre-loads of the bush due to the incremental kinematic rotation will be included when this option is enabled at each calculated step. By definition at static ride when there is no displacement the pre-loads will be zero.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Solve / Convert 2D to 3D:\plain\fs20  Convenience routine to \uldb convert\plain\fs20  existing 2D model data to selected 3D suspension.
\par 
\par \cf1 Solve / Point Tolerance Analysis:\plain\fs20  Performs a \uldb Tolerance analysis\plain\fs20  for the specified point. Open graphs indicate the range of displayed variable due to the limit box size.
\par 
\par \cf1 Solve / Set Tolerance Point:\plain\fs20  Set the suspension hard point to be used for any subsequent \uldb Tolerance analysis\plain\fs20 .
\par 
\par \cf1 Solve / Edit Point Tolerances:\plain\fs20  Lists the model hard points in a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tree\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  type view environment, to locate the required point and view/edit its current limit box settings. Limit box settings define the allowable +/- distances along each axis from the defined position.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Solve / Set All Point Tolerances to\'85:\plain\fs20  View/Edit routine to set all suspension hard points to the same values in one go.
\par 
\par \cf1 Solve / Roll Solution Type:\plain\fs20  Primarily for backwards compatibility with earlier versions, two roll center methods are available. The default (New) method, incrementally rolls the body about the original roll center position. The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Old\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  method used the previous steps calculated position as the roll point. The old method could lead to large amounts of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 jacking\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  and so was revised to the new method.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Solve / Wheelbase Diff Sol:\plain\fs20  Controls how a difference in the wheelbase is handled when adding a second axle to an existing model. If a difference is found between the wheelbase parameter and the distance between the two axle wheel centers, this option will determine whether the wheelbase parameter is adjusted, or the rear suspension is moved to match the wheelbase parameter.
\par 
\par \cf1 Solve / Grnd Plane Diff Sol:\plain\fs20  Controls how a difference in the ground plane position is handled when adding a second axle to an existing model. If a difference is found between the two ground plane values, this option will determine whether the difference is accommodated by translation, roll or bump/rebound corrections.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Solve / Solver Tolerances:\plain\fs20  Displays the current solution tolerances for viewing and editing. Solution tolerances listed include The kinematic solution tolerance, Bump small perturbation size and Steer small perturbation size.
\par 
\par \cf1 Solve / Point Coincidence:\plain\fs20  Enables \uldb Point Coincidence\plain\fs20  checking. With Point Coincidence on, editing hard points checks for more than one hard point within the pick tolerance and presents a list for selection, including \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 All points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . Selecting all points creates an equivalent temporary group during any subsequent change.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Solve / Report Errors:\plain\fs20  Switches error-reporting on/off. With recent changes to the solver unlikely to produce any errors reports for the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 default\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  templates.
\par 
\par \cf1 Solve / Set Ride Height - Bump:\plain\fs20  A utility function that will reset the vehicle model to a new ride height by simple change in the bump height. The value required is a delta from the current position. A positive value lowers the body, i.e. reduces the ride height.
\par 
\par \cf1 Solve / Set Ride Height \plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'96\f1  Bump + Pitch:\plain\fs20  A utility function that will reset the vehicle model to a new ride height by a combination of bump height change and pitch angle. The values required are the deltas from the current position. A positive bump value lowers the body, i.e. reduces the ride height and a positive pitch angle rotates towards the rear. For a full vehicle model the pitch rotation is about the front wheel center axis. For a single end model the pitch is rotation about the modeled suspension end.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Solve / Set Ride Height \plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'96\f1  Adjust Springs:\plain\fs20  A utility function that will reset the vehicle spring fitted lengths such that the spring forces balance the defined unsprung weight split. This results in no change in ride height, just changes to the relevant spring fitted length(s). The user must provide values for the unsprung mass and the percentage of the unsprung weight on the front axle.
\par 
\par \cf1 Solve / Set Ride Height \plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'96\f1  Match to Springs:\plain\fs20  A utility function that will reset the vehicle ride height such that the spring forces balance the defined unsprung weight split. This results a both bump and pitch changes in ride position, (only pitch if full vehicle model). The relevant spring fitted length(s) are also changed. The user must provide values for the unsprung mass and the percentage of the unsprung weight on the front axle. This allows the user to have spring properties dictate the ride height position.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Solve / Set Ride Height \plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'96\f1  Match to Weight Change:\plain\fs20  A utility function that will reset the vehicle ride height based on a change in vehicle unsprung weights. It is not assumed that the initial vehicle ride position balances the current spring settings, (this can be checked/set first using one of the two options above), but effects the change in ride position based purely on the difference between the two defined weight conditions.
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - Results
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \cf1 Results / List SDF File\'85:\plain\fs20  Opens the Suspension Derivative File (SDF). This scrollable textual display lists the an echo of the suspension hard points and incremental listings of the relevant suspension characteristics for all articulation types.
\par 
\par \cf1 Results / List SDF Spline Fits\'85:\plain\fs20  Opens the Suspension Derivative Spline Fits display. This scrollable textual display lists the an echo of the suspension hard points and listings of the spline fit equations for the selected suspension characteristics for all selected articulation types. The spline fit types include Linear, quadratic and cubic. 
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Results / List SDF Spline Data\'85:\plain\fs20  Opens the Suspension Derivative Spline Data display. This scrollable textual display lists the an echo of the suspension hard points and listings of each splines data points. The user can control which splines are listed as well as inclusion of header information and data echo.
\par 
\par \cf1 Results / List Bush Deflections\'85:\plain\fs20  Opens the scrollable text listing of bush deflections for compliant models under the current zero set load conditions.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Results / List Joint/Bush Rotations\'85:\plain\fs20  Opens the scrollable text listing of bush rotations for compliant models under the current zero set load conditions.
\par 
\par \cf1 Results / List Bush Forces\'85:\plain\fs20  Opens the scrollable text listing of bush forces for compliant models under the current zero set load conditions.
\par 
\par \cf1 Results / List All Point Coords for User Position\'85:\plain\fs20  Option to list suspension hard points at a user defined bump plus steer position. Define the required bump value, (+ve is in bump) and steer value.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Results / List a Point Coords at All Positions\'85:\plain\fs20  Option to list the co-ordinates of a single selected suspension hard point at a all current solution positions. User selects the required corner and point. The resultant textual display has full support for printing, saving and exporting.
\par 
\par \cf1 Results / List All Point Coords at a Positions\'85:\plain\fs20  This is the inverse of the previous option. It lists the co-ordinates of all points for a single selected position. The position is one from the current solver settings rather than a separately user defined position. User selects the required corner and position. The resultant textual display has full support for printing, saving and exporting.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Results / Display Compliance Values:\plain\fs20  Toggles the visibility of the Compliance coefficients display.
\par 
\par \cf1 Results / Ball Joint Rotations:\plain\fs20  Toggles the visibility of the Ball Joint rotations display. This option is only available in compliant mode. The results show the rotations of a selected joint over the prescribed travel. These rotations can be relative to local or global axes or to a pair of user defined points that identify the housing and ball axes.
\par 
\par \pard \cf1 Results / Display Kinematic Sum/Optimizer:\plain\fs20  Toggles the visibility of the display that not only lists the cumulative sum of all weighted deviations but also controls the sensitivity and optimization functions. These optimization settings include individual curve weightings, parameters required and range of interest. 
\par 
\par \cf1 Results / Modal Analysis Display..:\plain\fs20  Opens the Modal Analysis bar chart display. The display shows the frequency of each mode by the height of its bar. This option is only available in compliant mode. This display can be used to change the mode displayed in the 3d view, (the current mode is shown filled in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 cyan\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 ), by selecting the required modes bar with the left mouse button. This graph can be left open and is updated \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 live\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  as the model is changed.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Results / Forced-Damped Speed Sweep Display..:\plain\fs20  Opens the Forced-Damped Results graph.  This shows the displacement and rotation of each parts C of G at the specified frequency. The currently displayed frequency point in the 3d view is show on the graph by the vertical line. The currently displayed 3d view frequency can be changed by selecting the required point on the graph using the left mouse button. Whilst this graph display can be left open whilst you continue to edit the model it does not update in a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 live\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  manner due to the associated computational overheads. To update this display select from its right mouse menu list \i Refresh Plot\plain\fs20 .
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - SetUp
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \cf1 SetUp / Start Options / Toolbar Icons:\plain\fs20  Provides an option for two styles of icons. Select from either \cf1 Standard\plain\fs20  or \cf1 Mouse Sensitive\plain\fs20 . Standard icons have permanently visible boundaries to the icon, whilst mouse sensitive icons \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 raise\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  as the mouse passes over them. This change is stored to the ini file and will only be implemented on next program start-up.
\par 
\par \cf1 SetUp / Start Options / Toolbar Position:\plain\fs20  Sets the default starting position for the toolbars. All visible toolbars will be placed in this position when the application starts up. Once started the user can choose to change the toolbar positions individually as required. The four available positions are Top, Bottom, Left or Right. This change is stored to the ini file and will only be implemented on the next program start-up.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 SetUp / Start Options / Maximised:\plain\fs20  If checked defines that the application will start up with the main window maximised, (i.e. expanded to fill the current screen size). Note that if the application is maximised during use, then this will also set the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 maximised\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  setting. This change is stored to the ini file and will be implemented on next program start-up.
\par 
\par \cf1 SetUp / Exception Handler On:\plain\fs20  Provides a software trapping routine to handle application exception failures. Whilst this won\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t enable the user to recover the current session it will prevent the exception causing a complete system failure. Not normally required this release.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 SetUp / Visual Graphics Cursor:\plain\fs20  When enabled changes the appearance of the cursor on the main graphical display to indicate the difference between the various modes of dynamic view and on-screen editing. This setting is saved to the users ini file.
\par 
\par \cf1 SetUp / Save Def. Window Settings:\plain\fs20  When set this options will save to the users ini file the current size, positions and settings of the graphics and graph windows, such that on a subsequent program start-up all windows will be re-created in the same position/size as previously. They are referred to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 default\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  since users can store different settings to alternative files.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 SetUp / Save Window Settings to\'85:\plain\fs20  This option allows the user to save the current window and graph settings to a file. These settings can then be retrieved at a later stage or in future runs.
\par 
\par \cf1 SetUp / Load Window Settings from\'85:\plain\fs20  This option allows the user to retrieve from a previously saved file the settings for the main window and graphs. These settings included not only position and size but also displayed variables and axis settings.
\par 
\par \cf1 SetUp / Edit Window Offsets\'85:\plain\fs20  This option allows the user to specify the values used to determine the position of each window within the MDI interface. These may need to be changed by the user if you find yourself repeatedly having to re-position graph windows despite having used the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 save window settings\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  option.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 SetUp / Include User Graphics In Data Files:\plain\fs20  With the ability for users to quickly add their own graphical elements to the current template the option is given for users to include them with the data file. This provides a complete way of retaining data that is associated with the model.
\par 
\par \cf1 SetUp / Include User Templates In Data Files:\plain\fs20  With the ability for users to quickly modify the template by point addition etc. the option is given for users to include the template with the data file. This provides a complete way of retaining data that is associated with the model.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 SetUp / Include Optimizer Settings in Data Files:\plain\fs20  When checked provides data retention/continuity by including the optimizer settings as a sub-section of the model data file. Other wise these data settings could be lost through subsequent use.
\par 
\par \cf1 SetUp / File Toolbar Visibility:\plain\fs20  Sets the visibility option for the \cf1 File\plain\fs20  toolbar. This setting is saved to the ini file and will thus be applied to future runs.
\par 
\par \cf1 SetUp / View Toolbar Visibility:\plain\fs20  Sets the visibility option for the \cf1 View\plain\fs20  toolbar. This setting is saved to the ini file and will thus be applied to future runs.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 SetUp / Graphics Toolbar Visibility:\plain\fs20  Sets the visibility option for the \cf1 Graphics\plain\fs20  toolbar. This setting is saved to the ini file and will thus be applied to future runs.
\par 
\par \cf1 SetUp / Graph + Data Toolbar Visibility:\plain\fs20  Sets the visibility option for the \cf1 Graph and Data\plain\fs20  toolbar. This setting is saved to the ini file and will thus be applied to future runs.
\par 
\par \cf1 SetUp / Gen Defaults:\plain\fs20  Opens the general defaults data set for viewing and editing. They primarily deal with settings for the \uldb graphics\plain\fs20  display. They include upper and lower limits to the scaling, the tolerance for point picking, the tolerance for \uldb point coincidence\plain\fs20 , the \uldb joggle\plain\fs20  coarse step size and the \uldb animation\plain\fs20  refresh time step.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 SetUp / Groups / Current:\plain\fs20  Makes a previously created points \uldb group\plain\fs20  the current group. Groups are identified by their unique label from the menu list. Groups limit edit functions to just hard points that are members of the group. Edited points then move as a group, i.e. same translation applied to all.
\par 
\par \cf1 SetUp / Groups / Cancel:\plain\fs20  Cancels the current \uldb group\plain\fs20  selection, returning back to all hard points accessible for individual editing.
\par 
\par \cf1 SetUp / Groups / Delete:\plain\fs20  Deletes the selected \uldb group\plain\fs20 . This does not delete any points from the model, (as you can\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t do this at any level other than template editing), merely removes the group association. Groups are identified by their unique label from the menu list.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 SetUp / Groups / Create\'85:\plain\fs20  Creates an new points group. A new group must be given a unique label to identify it. The number of points required to add to it set and each required point picked from the available suspension end lists.
\par 
\par \cf1 SetUp / Groups / Pick Temporary\'85:\plain\fs20  Creates an new temporary points group . The points are added to this group by selecting a displayed screen region. All visible points within the region being added to it. Unlike the conventional groups this does not need to have a label nor does it need to be \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 made current\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , once the points have been picked it will automatically be set to current.  Temporary groups are not saved and when made non-current using the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 delete\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  option they are lost and would need to be re-created.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 SetUp / Groups / Edit:\plain\fs20  Provides an editing option to existing point groups. The points in the group can be changed, added to or removed from. Groups are identified by their unique label from the menu list.
\par 
\par \cf1 SetUp / Undo Buffer Length:\plain\fs20  Sets the length of the \uldb undo\plain\fs20  buffer. The greater the number the more undo steps that will be stored. Setting this value to zero will disable the undo function.
\par 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - Window
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \cf1 Window / Tile Horizontal:\plain\fs20  Automatic window positioning option that lays open windows in to a primarily horizontal layout.
\par 
\par \cf1 Window / Tile Vertical (Picked Order):\plain\fs20  Automatic window positioning option that lays open windows in to a primarily vertical layout. The order that they are arranged in is the order that they have been selected, on start-up this would be the inverse of the order that they were created in.
\par 
\par \cf1 Window / Tile Vertical (Created Order):\plain\fs20  Automatic window positioning option that lays open windows in to a primarily vertical layout. The order that they are arranged in is based on the creation order with the graphics display first and then graphs 1 to n.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Window / Cascade:\plain\fs20  Automatic window positioning option. All open windows are re-sized to a common size and cascaded down from the top left hand corner in regular steps.
\par 
\par \cf1 Window / View Custom Control Display:\plain\fs20  Pick from list to open a previously defined custom control display. Custom controls are added to this list as they are created by the user using the following menu option. When permanently deleted using the WinDelete option, they are removed from this list.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Window / Open New Custom Control Display:\plain\fs20  Creates a new custom control display dialogue box. Users can add their own buttons, toggles, icons, gauges, sliders, text entries, value entries, bar charts and bars widgets to it. Data variables and commands can be assigned to these widgets to allow users to build their own specific interfaces. Within each window users can switch between use/edit modes to move, add, and edit widgets. Custom dialogue settings are saved to the users ini file for subsequent reuse. Users can save custom dialogue settings to and from external files. This provides a method of passing custom settings between users.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Window / Backdrop:\plain\fs20  Option to add a graphic image to the background of the main window. Six default options are provided together with a n option for a user defined bitmap. The background image can be optionally tiled to repeat the pattern over the entire region. Alternatively if not tiled the image will be stretched to fill the area.
\par 
\par \cf1 Window / User Backdrop File\'85:\plain\fs20  File browser to identify the user specified backdrop bitmap.
\par 
\par \cf1 Window / Tile Backdrop:\plain\fs20  Defines whether backdrop image will be stretched or tiled to fill the area.
\par \pard 
\par The \cf1 Window\plain\fs20  menu has appended to it an entry for each child window. Child windows include graphic displays all graphs and results displays.
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - Help
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \cf1 Help / Contents (F1):\plain\fs20  Opens this help file at the contents page.
\par 
\par \cf1 Help / Search for Help On\'85:\plain\fs20  Opens this help file at the \plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 index\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  page to allow for searching through the help file by key words.
\par 
\par \cf1 Help / How to Use Help:\plain\fs20  Opens the standard Windows\'ae Help document, describing how to use on-line help files.
\par 
\par \cf1 Help / About Lotus Suspension Analysis\'85:\plain\fs20  Displays the Lotus Suspension Analysis \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 about\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  box listing both the major and minor release levels. Support contact details are also given.
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Mouse Right Button Menu Items \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Graphics
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20 \tab 
\par No specific menus are used on the graphics display for the right mouse button, Instead it is used as a quick cycle through the available \uldb tracking directions\plain\fs20  or cycle through the \uldb dynamic viewing modes\plain\fs20  as appropriate for the current dynamic viewing status.
\par 
\par In the view \uldb zoom\plain\fs20  mode the right mouse button will cancel the zoom event.
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Mouse Right Button Menu Items \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Graphs
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \cf1 Y-Variable (SDF):\plain\fs20  Used to change the displayed y-variable for the selected \uldb graph\plain\fs20 . Lists all available options, (some may not be relevant to the current module or model). The current variable is shown checked in the list.
\par 
\par \cf1 Y-Variable (Front Graphic):\plain\fs20  Used to change the displayed y-variable for the selected graph to one from the current front suspension graphical elements. Lists all available options, (some may not actually have a plotable result). The current variable is shown checked in the list.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Y-Variable (Rear Graphic):\plain\fs20  Used to change the displayed y-variable for the selected graph to one from the current rear suspension graphical elements. Lists all available options, (some may not actually have a plotable result). The current variable is shown checked in the list.
\par 
\par \cf1 Edit Front (+Y) User Line:\plain\fs20  Lists the selected graphs\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  user line for viewing and editing. The number of points well as the x and y values can edited. On closure the user line data is checked for ascending order on the x-values, if not ascending the data is shuffled unit it is. Not that individual user lines are defined for each corner. This is for the front +Y corner.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Edit Front (-Y) User Line:\plain\fs20  Lists the selected graphs\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  user line for viewing and editing. The number of points well as the x and y values can edited. On closure the user line data is checked for ascending order on the x-values, if not ascending the data is shuffled unit it is. Not that individual user lines are defined for each corner. This is for the front -Y corner.
\par 
\par \cf1 Edit Rear (+Y) User Line:\plain\fs20  Lists the selected graphs\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  user line for viewing and editing. The number of points well as the x and y values can edited. On closure the user line data is checked for ascending order on the x-values, if not ascending the data is shuffled unit it is. Not that individual user lines are defined for each corner. This is for the rear +Y corner.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Edit Rear (-Y) User Line:\plain\fs20  Lists the selected graphs\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  user line for viewing and editing. The number of points well as the x and y values can edited. On closure the user line data is checked for ascending order on the x-values, if not ascending the data is shuffled unit it is. Not that individual user lines are defined for each corner. This is for the rear -Y corner.
\par 
\par \cf1 Autoscale:\plain\fs20  Autoscales the selected graph for both x and y-axes. Includes all visible lines on the graph. To autoscale all graphs use the main menu or equivalent toolbar icon.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Autoscale Y only:\plain\fs20  Autoscales the selected graph for just its y-axes. Includes all visible lines on the graph. To autoscale all graphs use the main menu or equivalent toolbar icon.
\par 
\par \cf1 Autoscale to Y Increment:\plain\fs20  Autoscales the selected graph for just its y-axes. Includes all visible lines on the graph. The autoscale function is based rounding to a specified increment. The increment being definable for each individual graph. To edit the increment refer to the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Axis Scales\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  right mouse menu option.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Zoom:\plain\fs20  Pick the area of the selected graph to fit the current window. The zoom function can accommodate either a two press approach to area selection or a single press, hold and drag selection, a simple time delay trap being used to identify which type is being used. The zoomed area will become the plotted region.
\par 
\par \cf1 Copy Front Data to User:\plain\fs20  Convenience function copies the existing Front result line to the User Line. Only the selected graphs\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  values are copied over.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Copy Rear Data to User:\plain\fs20  Convenience function copies the existing Rear result line to the User Line. Only the selected graphs\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  values are copied over.
\par 
\par \cf1 Copy Front Scope to User from / Position n:\plain\fs20  Convenience function copies the existing Front scope line to the User Line. Only the selected graphs\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  values are copied over. You need to identify which scope position you are copying from.
\par 
\par \cf1 Copy Rear Scope to User from / Position n:\plain\fs20  Convenience function copies the existing Rear scope line to the User Line. Only the selected graphs\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  values are copied over. You need to identify which scope position you are copying from.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Axis Scales:\plain\fs20  Displays the selected graphs x and y-axis settings. Axes are defined simply by the minimum and maximum values. This display also lists the value used for the autoscale to Y increment option.
\par 
\par \cf1 Set All X-axis to Displ. Range:\plain\fs20  Sets the x-axis settings for all the graphs to the limits of the currently defined suspension travel.
\par 
\par \cf1 Edit All X-axis Scale:\plain\fs20  Displays the x-axis scale edit box. The displayed values will be the current settings for the selected graph. All graphs will have their x-axis values set to the entered numbers.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 List Data Line(s):\plain\fs20  Lists the selected graphs current results (data) line for viewing. As these are calculated results they are display only. Both front and rear axles are listed, (if applicable).
\par 
\par \cf1 Copy to Clipboard:\plain\fs20  Copies the selected graph display to the Windows clipboard such that it can be pasted into other applications.
\par 
\par \cf1 Save to File\'85:\plain\fs20  Saves the selected graph to file. Three format types are currently supported, bmp, jpg and png.
\par 
\par \cf1 Open in MATLAB:\plain\fs20  Opens the selected graph directly in Matlab as a graph. This thus provides a 'one-click' option to pass graph data from Shark to Matlab. If this option is greyed out then the application has been unable to identify the location of the Matlab product, normally because it is not installed on the machine. If it has been subsequently installed users can re-scan for the Matlab product via the menu option \i Setup / Re-run search for installed components.\plain\fs20 
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Open in EXCEL:\plain\fs20  Opens a new Excel worksheet filled with the selected graphs data values. This thus provides a 'one-click' option to pass graph data from Shark to Excel. If this option is greyed out then the application has been unable to identify the location of the Excel executable, normally because it is not installed on the machine. If it has been subsequently installed users can re-scan for the Excel executable via the menu option \i Setup / Re-run search for installed components.\plain\fs20 
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Mouse Right Button Menu Items \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Compliance Coefficients
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The right mouse menu on the \uldb compliance coefficients\plain\fs20  display has two forms the long form and the short form. The long form is listed if the selection is within a bar region of the chart and the short form is the pick is on the chart but not on a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 bar\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
\par 
\par \cf1 Y Variable:\plain\fs20  Used to change the displayed y-variable for the selected bar. Lists all available options, (some may not be relevant to the current module or model). The current bars variable is shown checked in the list.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Edit Limit Setting:\plain\fs20  Displays for viewing and editing, the selected bars\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  design limit value. This is used to draw a horizontal line on the bar chart as a visual indicator of the analysis results.
\par 
\par \cf1 Edit Scale Setting:\plain\fs20  Displays for viewing and editing, the selected bars\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  full-scale deflection value. This should be adjusted to encompass the required/anticipated limit.
\par 
\par \cf1 Edit Weighting Setting:\plain\fs20  Displays for viewing and editing, the selected bars\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  weighting value used to calculate the combined summation of selected variables. This effects the optimization and total sum display.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Remove Selected Variable:\plain\fs20  .Removes the selected bar from its force sets graph.
\par 
\par \cf1 Add Extra Variable:\plain\fs20  For the selected force sets\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  graph, an extra variable is added to the display. This variable is changed via the Y-variable menu option.
\par 
\par \cf1 Set All Limit Values to Current:\plain\fs20   For all defined compliance bars the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Limit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  value is set to the current value. This is a convenience feature that quickly defines a complete set of limits.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Autoscale All Visible Lines:\plain\fs20   All defined compliance bars have the Scale settings set to the current values, with a clip margin. This enables all compliance factors to be visible through a single menu selection.
\par 
\par \cf1 Set All Visible Line Scales to Unity:\plain\fs20   All defined compliance bars have the Scale settings set to unity. This enables all compliance factor scale settings to be returned to unity through a single menu selection.
\par 
\par \cf1 Edit All Line Limits/Scale/Weights\'85:\plain\fs20   Opens a display window that allows all Limits, Scales and Weightings for the compliance curves to be edited through a single display rather than by picking individually.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Include Spring Force in Set:\plain\fs20  For the selected force set toggles whether the spring force is included in the compliant calculation.
\par 
\par \cf1 Make Force Set Default:\plain\fs20  Makes the selected force set the current one. The current one is indicated by the red highlight, and becomes the force set displayed on the graphics and graphs.
\par 
\par \cf1 Turn Force Set \plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'91\f1 Off\plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'92\f1 :\plain\fs20  turns the status of the selected force set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . Its data is not lost but it will not be used in the calculations and its compliant chart will be removed from the display.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 Turn All Force Sets \plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'91\f1 On\plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'92\f1 :\plain\fs20  Sets all defined force sets to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . Each force set will then have its own graph displayed.
\par 
\par \cf1 Open External Forces Edit\'85:\plain\fs20  Opens the \uldb external force\plain\fs20  edit box. This allows the current external force settings to be viewed and edited.
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Icon Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  General
\par \pard \plain\f0\fs20 
\par \f1 The following icons are used within the application dialogue boxes. A brief description is given for each.
\par 
\par \b \{bmc bm128.bmp\} Generic Editor Icon, normally opens standard data editor display.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm129.bmp\} Opens this Help File at context sensitive page
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Icon Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  File Toolbar
\par \pard \plain\f0\fs20 
\par \f1 The following icons are displayed on the File toolbar. A brief description is given for each.
\par 
\par \b \{bmc bm130.bmp\} Open existing data file.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm131.bmp\} Save data to file
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm132.bmp\} Change to 2D \uldb module\plain\b\fs20 , Bump articulation
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm133.bmp\} Change to 2D \uldb module\plain\b\fs20 , Roll articulation
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm134.bmp\} Change to 3D \uldb module\plain\b\fs20 , Bump articulation
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm135.bmp\} Change to 3D \uldb module\plain\b\fs20 , Roll articulation
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm136.bmp\} Change to 3D \uldb module\plain\b\fs20 , Steer articulation
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm137.bmp\} Change to move ground plane in bump solver option
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm138.bmp\} Change to move body in bump solver option
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm139.bmp\} Toggle 3D \uldb compliant\plain\b\fs20  solver setting
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm140.bmp\} Toggle 3D compliance use \uldb external forces\plain\b\fs20  setting
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm141.bmp\} Toggle \uldb Tolerance analysis\plain\b\fs20  status
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm142.bmp\} Set to \uldb Edit\plain\b\fs20  mode
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm143.bmp\} Set to \uldb Joggle\plain\b\fs20  edit mode
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm144.bmp\} Set to \uldb Drag\plain\b\fs20  edit mode
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Icon Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  View Toolbar
\par \pard \plain\f0\fs20 
\par \f1 The following icons are displayed on the view toolbar. A brief description is given for each.
\par 
\par \b \{bmc bm145.bmp\} Toggle \uldb dynamic viewing\plain\b\fs20  on/off.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm146.bmp\} Set dynamic view on and mode to translate.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm147.bmp\} Set dynamic view on and mode to scale.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm148.bmp\} Set dynamic view on and mode to rotate.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm149.bmp\} Start zoom event on the graphics display.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm150.bmp\} Autoscale all open graphs.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm151.bmp\} Set graphics view style to Wire Frame.
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm152.bmp\} Set graphics view style to Solid Fill.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm153.bmp\} Set graphics view style to Hidden Line.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm154.bmp\} Set graphics view style to Depth Buffered (flat shaded).
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm155.bmp\} Set graphics view to Y-Z plane.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm156.bmp\} Set graphics view to X-Z plane.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm157.bmp\} Set graphics view to X-Y plane.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm158.bmp\} Save current graphics view to temporary store.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm159.bmp\} Cycle though the available \uldb tracking\plain\b\fs20  options, or the available \uldb dynamic view\plain\b\fs20  options.
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Icon Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Graphics Toolbar
\par \pard \plain\f0\fs20 
\par \f1 The following icons are displayed on the Graphics toolbar. A brief description is given for each.
\par 
\par \b \{bmc bm160.bmp\} Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the hard point template numbers.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm161.bmp\} Turns point limits to \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'91\f1 use\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1 . If the current visibility setting of the \uldb limit boxes\plain\b\fs20  was \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1  they will be turned \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1 .
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm162.bmp\} Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the hard point co-ordinates.
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm163.bmp\} Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the springs\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1  enhanced graphics.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm164.bmp\} Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the dampers\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1  enhanced graphics.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm165.bmp\} Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the wheels\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1  enhanced graphics.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm166.bmp\} Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the pivots\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1  enhanced graphics.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm167.bmp\} Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the grids\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1  enhanced graphics.
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm168.bmp\} Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the body\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1 s enhanced graphics. Will only appear if a default body type has been set, (see data menu).
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm169.bmp\} Set the graphics display to show both front and rear axle models, (if loaded).
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm170.bmp\} Sets the graphic display to show the front suspension model only, (note you will not be able to select this option if you only have a rear suspension loaded).
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm171.bmp\} Sets the graphic display to show the rear suspension model only, (note you will not be able to select this option if you only have a front suspension loaded).
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm172.bmp\} Toggles the \uldb animation\plain\b\fs20  status. Stops or starts the animation of the model over the currently set articulation range.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm173.bmp\} Toggles the graphics display setting for drawing both suspension sides.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm174.bmp\} Copies the current graphic display to the Windows\'ae clipboard.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Icon Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Graphs + Data Toolbar
\par \pard \plain\f0\fs20 
\par \f1 The following icons are displayed on the Graphs + Data toolbar. A brief description is given for each.
\par 
\par \b \{bmc bm175.bmp\} Open a new results \uldb graph\plain\b\fs20 .
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm176.bmp\} Autoscales all open graphs.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm177.bmp\} Opens the model property display. Tree structure based display to access model properties.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm178.bmp\} Opens the front suspension hard point values for viewing and editing, (not available if only rear suspension loaded).
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm179.bmp\} Opens the rear suspension hard point values for viewing and editing, (not available if only front suspension loaded).
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm180.bmp\} Lists the Parameters data set for viewing and editing.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm181.bmp\} Lists the Tyre data set values for viewing and editing.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm182.bmp\} Opens the Suspension Derivative File (SDF). This scrollable textual display lists the an echo of the suspension hard points and incremental listings of the relevant suspension characteristics for all articulation types.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm183.bmp\} Saves the current suspension hard points to a temporary store, given a unique label for possible later retrieval. This temporary store only exists whilst the application is open such that all saved co-ordinate sets are lost when the application is closed. Any number of sets can be stored.
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm184.bmp\} Cancels the current \uldb group\plain\b\fs20  selection, returning back to all hard points accessible for individual editing.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm185.bmp\} Creates an new points group. A new group must be given a unique label to identify it. The number of points required to add to it set and each required point picked from the available suspension end lists.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm186.bmp\} Runs a utility function that will reset the vehicle model to a new ride height. The value required is a delta from the current position. A positive value lowers the body, i.e. reduces the ride height.
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm187.bmp\} Option to list suspension hard points at a defined bump plus steer position. Define the required bump value, (+ve is in bump) and steer value.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm188.bmp\} Automatic window positioning option. All open windows are re-sized to a common size and cascaded down from the top left hand corner in regular steps.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b \{bmc bm189.bmp\} Convenience routine to \uldb convert\plain\b\fs20  existing 2D model data to selected 3D suspension.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements - Introduction
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par This section describes the data requirements for both the 2D and 3D suspension analysis modules. Each data variable is listed, together with its units and any default value.
\par 
\par The listings are broken down into sections as they are displayed in the interface.
\par 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Co-ordinate System
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 SHARK\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  co-ordinate system is a right handed system with the Y-axis across the car track, the origin of which is assumed to be on the vehicle centre line and the +ve direction being towards the offside suspension (Right hand Corner sitting in car). The X-axis is along the vehicle wheelbase, normally with the origin in front of the vehicle with the +ve direction towards the rear. The X-axis only applies to the 3D module, all 2D modes being in the Y-Z or cross car plane. The Z-axis is the vertical height, the origin of which for 2D modes is assumed to be the ground plane, but for the 3D modes can be at any height position. The +ve direction is taken as upwards, (note this co-ordinate system is different to the original UNIX version of SHARK, which had the X and Y axes transposed).
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm190.bmp\}
\par \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 SHARK\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  Co-ordinate System
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 {\up K}
\b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  2D Data Requirements
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The 2D module has some specific requirements for data. It has a reduced set of \uldb suspension types\plain\fs20  when compared to the 3D module, whilst its \uldb General data\plain\fs20  set has variables unique to the 2D module. Some of the General data values are common to both the 2D and 3D modules and will be covered in the description of the \uldb 3D data\plain\fs20  requirements.
\par 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  2D Suspension Type
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The available suspension types for the 2D module are \uldb Double Wishbone\plain\fs20  or \uldb Macpherson Strut\plain\fs20 .
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm7.bmp\}
\par Setting the 2D Suspension type from the New menu
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 {\up K}
\b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  2D General Data
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Vehicle Track,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 1600 mm)
\par Sets the static vehicle track, the value is the Y-axis distance between the two assumed tyre contact patch centre\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s. Must be a positive number
\par 
\par \b Kingpin Angle, \plain\fs20  (real),  (units deg),  (default 10 deg)
\par Sets the static kingpin angle, being the angle between the upper and lower ball joints in the Y-Z or cross car plane for a double wishbone suspension type, or the angle between the strut top and the lower ball joint, again in the Y-Z plane, for a Macpherson strut suspension. A positive Kingpin angle is taken as when the upper ball joint, (or strut top), is inboard of the lower ball joint, i.e. smaller Y value.
\par \pard 
\par \b Kingpin Offset at Ground, \plain\fs20  (real),  (units mm),  (default 20 mm)
\par Sets the static Kingpin offset, the offset being the Y-axis or cross car distance between the tyre contact patch centre and the intersection of the kingpin axis with the ground. A positive offset is when the tyre contact patch centre is outboard of the kingpin axis intersection. 
\par 
\par \b Damper Angle, \plain\fs20  (real),  (units deg),  (default 10 deg) \{\-\b Strut Only\plain\fs20 \'7d
\par Sets the static damper angle, being the angle between the strut top and a point on the strut slider axis, in the Y-Z plane. A positive damper angle is taken as when the strut top is inboard of the strut slider point, i.e. smaller Y value.
\par \pard 
\par \b Camber Change in Bump, \plain\fs20  (real),  (deg/mm),  (default -0.04 deg/mm)
\par This value is used initially to set the user defined camber change line on the camber angle graph over the bump travel region. It is subsequently used to define the required wheel camber angle in bump travel, when a degree of freedom is introduced into the suspension model. A positive value indicates an increase in positive camber with positive wheel travel.\b\ul 
\par \page
\pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Camber Change in Rebound, \plain\fs20 (real), (deg/mm), (default -0.04 deg/mm)
\par This value is used initially to set the user defined camber change line on the camber angle graph over the rebound travel region. It is subsequently used to define the required wheel camber angle in rebound travel, when a degree of freedom is introduced into the suspension model. A positive value indicates an increase in positive camber with positive wheel travel.\b\ul 
\par \plain\f0\fs20 
\par \f1\b Camber Change in Roll, \plain\fs20  (real),  (units deg/mm),  (default 0.5 deg/deg)
\par \pard This value is used initially to set the user defined camber change line on the camber angle against roll graph. It is subsequently used to define the required wheel camber angle under roll articulation, when a degree of freedom is introduced into the suspension model. A positive value indicates an increase in positive camber with a positive roll angle.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Static Roll Centre Height, \plain\fs20  (real),  (units mm),  (default 50 mm)
\par Sets the static roll centre height, this is the distance up the Z-axis from the ground plane to the required static roll centre.
\par \pard 
\par \b Roll Centre Height Change in Bump, \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm/mm), (default 1.0 mm/mm)
\par This value is used initially to set the user defined roll centre height line on the roll centre height graph over the bump travel region. It is subsequently used to define the required roll centre height in bump travel, when a degree of freedom is introduced into the suspension model. A positive value indicates an increase in the roll centre height with positive wheel travel.\b\ul 
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \pard \b Roll Centre Height Change in Rebound, \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm/mm), (def 1.0 mm/mm)
\par This value is used initially to set the user defined roll centre height line on the roll centre height graph over the rebound travel region. It is subsequently used to define the required roll centre height in rebound travel, when a degree of freedom is introduced into the suspension model. A positive value indicates an increase in the roll centre height with positive wheel travel.
\par \b\ul 
\par \page
\pard \plain\b\fs20 Roll Centre Height Change in Roll, \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm/deg), (default 0.0 mm/mm)
\par This value is used initially to set the user defined roll centre height line on the roll centre height against roll graph. It is subsequently used to define the required roll centre height in roll articulation, when a degree of freedom is introduced into the suspension model. A positive value indicates an increase in roll centre height with a positive roll angle. 
\par 
\par \b Roll Centre Lateral Change in Roll, \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm/deg), (default 0.0 mm/mm)
\par \pard This value is used initially to set the user defined roll centre lateral line on the roll centre lateral against roll graph. It is subsequently used to define the required roll centre lateral position in roll articulation, when a degree of freedom is introduced into the suspension model. A positive value indicates an increase in roll centre lateral Y value with a positive roll angle.\b\ul 
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b Bump Travel, \plain\fs20  (real),  (units mm), (default 60 mm)
\par Sets the bump travel from static ride, it is the distance in the Z-axis that the ground plane, (or body), is moved through. Must be a positive number.
\par \pard 
\par \b No. of Bump Solution Steps, \plain\fs20  (integer),  (default 4)
\par Sets the number of solution steps performed between static and full bump travel.
\par 
\par \b Rebound Travel, \plain\fs20  (real),  (units mm), (default 60 mm)
\par Sets the rebound travel from static ride, it is the distance in the Z-axis that the ground plane, (or body), is moved through. Must be a positive number.
\par 
\par \b No. of Rebound Solution Steps, \plain\fs20  (integer),  (default 4)
\par Sets the number of solution steps performed between static and full rebound travel.
\par \pard 
\par \b Roll Travel, \plain\fs20  (real),  (units deg), (default 5 deg)
\par Sets the roll travel from static ride, it is the total angle that the body is rolled about the X-axis. Must be a positive number.
\par 
\par \b No. of Roll Solution Steps, \plain\fs20  (integer),  (default 4)
\par Sets the number of solution steps performed between static and full roll.
\par 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  2D Double Wishbone Suspension Hard Points
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b 2D Double Wishbone Suspension Hard Points
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b Lower Outer Height (Z), \plain\fs20  (real),  (units mm),  (default 200 mm)
\par Defines the static Z height of the lower wishbone outer ball joint, relative to the ground plane.
\par 
\par \b Upper Outer Height (Z), \plain\fs20  (real),  (units mm),  (default 500 mm)
\par Defines the static Z height of the upper wishbone outer ball joint, relative to the ground plane.
\par 
\par \b Lower Inner Cross Car (Y), \plain\fs20  (real),  (units mm),  (default 248 mm)
\par \pard Defines the static Y co-ordinate of the lower wishbone inner ball joint, relative to the vehicle centre line. 
\par 
\par \b Lower Inner Height (Z), \plain\fs20  (real),  (units mm),  (default 175 mm)
\par Defines the static Z height of the lower wishbone inner ball joint, relative to the ground plane.
\par 
\par \b Upper Inner Cross Car (Y), \plain\fs20  (real),  (units mm),  (default 367 mm)
\par Defines the static Y co-ordinate of the upper wishbone inner ball joint, relative to the vehicle centre line. 
\par 
\par \pard \b Upper Inner Height (Z), \plain\fs20  (real),  (units mm),  (default 426 mm)
\par Defines the static Z height of the upper wishbone inner ball joint, relative to the ground plane.
\par 
\par (Note: All 2D suspension Z co-ordinates are relative to an assumed zero ground plane, i.e., Z origin is ground plane.)
\par 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  2D Macpherson Strut Suspension Hard Points
\par \pard \fs20 
\par 2D Macpherson Strut Suspension Hard Points
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b Lower Outer Height (Z), \plain\fs20  (real),  (units mm),  (default 200 mm)
\par Defines the static Z height of the lower wishbone outer ball joint, relative to the ground plane.
\par 
\par \b Strut Top Height (Z), \plain\fs20  (real),  (units mm),  (default 500 mm)
\par Defines the static Z height of the strut top, relative to the ground plane.
\par 
\par \b Lower Inner Cross Car (Y), \plain\fs20  (real),  (units mm),  (default 248 mm)
\par Defines the static Y co-ordinate of the lower wishbone inner ball joint, relative to the vehicle centre line. 
\par \pard 
\par \b Lower Inner Height (Z), \plain\fs20  (real),  (units mm),  (default 175 mm)
\par Defines the static Z height of the lower wishbone inner ball joint, relative to the ground plane.
\par \pard\li1435 
\par \pard (Note: All 2D suspension Z co-ordinates are relative to an assumed zero ground plane, i.e., Z origin is ground plane.)
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D Data Requirements
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The 3D module data requirements are broken down in to sets. Each set is described separately. The data requirements for each of the default \uldb suspension template\plain\fs20  types is listed. Some of the data sets given here apply in part to both the 3D module and the 2D module.
\par 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D Suspension End
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par Suspension models are defined as being associated to either the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Front\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Read\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  end of the vehicle. The allowable suspension templates vary depending on this selection, since front suspension types must be steerable.
\par 
\par Complete vehicle models can be built, (i.e. Front and Rear models), by creating one of each through the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 new\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  menu.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm0.bmp\}
\par Selecting the Suspension end and templates from the New display
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D Suspension Type
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b 3D Suspension Type
\par \plain\fs20 
\par Since users can create/delete and include their own templates the lists given here may not be the same as displayed. The presented lists represent the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 standard\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  templates that are \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 hard-coded\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1   into the as-shipped application.
\par 
\par \pard\li1435 For front suspension\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \tab Select From:\tab 
\par \pard\tx355 \tab \tab \tab \tab Type 1    Double wishbone, damper to lower wishbone.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 3    Steerable Macpherson strut.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 6    Double Wishbone, damper to upper wishbone.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 12  Steerable twin parallel wishbones + knuckle.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 14  Double wishbone, push rod to damper.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 15  Double wishbone, rocker arm damper.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 17  Double wishbone, pushrod monoshock.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 18  Double wishbone, upper toe link + \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 S\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  link.
\par \pard\tx355 \tab \tab \tab \tab Type 20  Double wishbone, twin outer ball joints.
\par \tab \tab \tab \tab Type 22  Double wishbone, twin outer ball joints spring front.
\par \tab \tab \tab \tab Type 23  Double wishbone, anti roll bar
\par \tab \tab \tab \tab Type 24  Steerable Macpherson Strut, twin outer ball joints.
\par \tab \tab \tab \tab Type 25  Double wishbone, twin lower outer ball joints.
\par \tab \tab \tab \tab Type 26  Double wishbone, compliant rack, damper to lower.
\par \tab \tab \tab \tab Type 27  Steerable Macpherson Strut, twin lower link.
\par 
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 For rear suspension\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s
\par \tab Select From:\tab 
\par \pard\tx355 \tab \tab \tab \tab Type 1    Double wishbone, damper to lower wishbone.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 2    \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 H\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  frame lower, single upper link.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 3    Steerable Macpherson strut.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 4    Non-Steerable Mac strut, twin lower link.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 5    5-Link Rigid Axle, (Panhard Rod).
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 6    Double Wishbone, damper to upper wishbone.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 7    Non-Steerable Mac strut, toe link to wishbone.
\par \pard\tx355 \tab \tab              \tab Type 8    4-Link Rigid Axle, (Panhard Rod).
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 9    4-Link Rigid Axle, (twin upper).
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 10  Trailing arm, upper and lower rear links.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 11  Semi trailing arm.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 12  Steerable twin parallel wishbones + knuckle.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 14  Double wishbone, push rod to damper.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 15  Double wishbone, rocker arm damper.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 16  Non-Steerable lower \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 A\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  with toe link.
\par \pard\tx355 \tab \tab              \tab Type 17  Double wishbone, pushrod monoshock.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 18  Double wishbone, upper toe link + \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 S\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  link.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 19  Hinged Trailing Arm, Twin Lower Link.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 20  Double Wishbone, twin outer ball joints.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 21  5-Link Rigid Axle, (Watts Linkage).
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 22  Double Wishbone, Twin outer ball joints, Spring front.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 23  Double Wishbone, anti roll bar. 
\par \pard\tx355 \tab \tab              \tab Type 24  Steerable Macpherson Strut, twin outer ball joints.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 25  Double Wishbone, Twin Lower Outer ball joints.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 26  Double Wishbone, compliant rack, damper to lower.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 27  Steerable Mcpherson Strut, twin lower link.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 28  4-Link Rear, transverse control link.
\par \tab \tab              \tab Type 29  Twist Beam \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  twin Wheel.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm8.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Selecting the Front Suspension template from the New display
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D General Data (Parameters)
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b 3D General Data
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b Bump Travel, \plain\fs20  (real),  (units mm), (default 60 mm)
\par Sets the bump travel from static ride, it is the distance in the Z-axis that the ground plane, (or body), is moved through. Must be a positive number. Note that the bump and rebound travel values would normally define an even increment bounded articulation definition. This can be changed to a step-by-step definition sequence similar to that used for the combined mode but with out any steering input. This is enabled/edited through the \i Data / Use Extended Bump Travel\plain\fs20  and \i Data / Edit Extended Bump Travel \plain\fs20 menu options.
\par \pard 
\par \b Rebound Travel, \plain\fs20  (real),  (units mm), (default 60 mm)
\par Sets the rebound travel from static ride, it is the distance in the Z-axis that the ground plane, (or body), is moved through. Must be a positive number. See also bump travel above with regard to extended bump travel option.
\par 
\par \b Bump/Rebound Increment, \plain\fs20  (real),  (units mm),  (default 5 mm)
\par Set the solution step size in bump and rebound when animating or listing SDF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s. See also bump travel above with regard to extended bump travel option.
\par \pard 
\par \b Roll Angle, \plain\fs20  (real),  (units deg), (default 3 deg)
\par Sets the roll travel from static ride, it is the total angle that the body is rolled about the Y-axis. Must be a positive number.
\par 
\par \b Roll Increment, \plain\fs20  (real),  (units deg),  (default 0.25 deg)
\par Sets the solution step size in roll when animating or listing SDF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s.
\par 
\par \b Steer Travel, \plain\fs20  (real),  (units mm),  (default 30.0 mm)
\par Sets the limit of steering travel for the inner ball joint in the X-axis or cross car direction.
\par \pard 
\par \b Steer Increment, \plain\fs20  (real),  (units mm),  (default 2.0 mm)
\par Sets the solution step size in steering when animating or listing SDF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s.
\par 
\par \b Wheelbase,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 2240 mm)
\par Sets the static vehicle wheelbase, the value is the Y-axis distance between the front and rear wheel centre\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s. Must be a positive number.
\par 
\par \b C of G Height, \plain\fs20  (real),  (units mm),  (default 60 mm)
\par Sets the static centre of gravity height, the distance in the Z-axis of the C of G from the ground plane.
\par \pard 
\par \b Breaking On Front,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units %),  (default 60 %)
\par Defines the brake split between the front and rear axles, by defining the % braking effort on the front axle.
\par 
\par \b Drive On Front,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units %),  (default 0 %)
\par Defines the drive split between the front and rear axles, by defining the % drive to the front axle. Thus a rear wheel drive car has a value of 0%, whilst a front wheel drive car has a value of 100%.
\par \page
\pard 
\par \b Weight On Front,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units %),  (default 40 %)
\par Defines the weight split between the front and rear axles, by defining the % weight on the front axle.
\par 
\par \b Front Brake Type,  \plain\fs20 (integer),  (default 2)
\par Defines the brake type for the front suspension as either inboard (1), or outboard (2).
\par 
\par \b Rear Brake Type,  \plain\fs20 (integer),  (default 2)
\par Defines the brake type for the rear suspension as either inboard (1), or outboard (2).
\par 
\par \b Total Sprung Weight,  \plain\fs20 (real), (units kg) (default 0.0)
\par \pard Defines the total sprung weight of the vehicle, (sum of front and rear).
\par 
\par \b Front Suspension Type,  \plain\fs20 (integer),  (default 1)
\par Defines the suspension type for the front suspension as either independent (1), or rigid (2).
\par 
\par \b Rear Suspension Type,  \plain\fs20 (integer),  (default 1)
\par Defines the suspension type for the rear suspension as either independent (1), or rigid (2).
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm191.bmp\}
\par Editing the Parameters (General Data) data set
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D Body Type
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The 3D body type is a menu selection rather than a data variable. The menu choices are;
\par 
\par \pard\tx355 \tab None
\par \tab Saloon
\par \tab Open Sports
\par \tab Old Single Seater
\par \tab Single Seater
\par \tab Utility
\par \tab Super Saloon
\par \tab Mini Van
\par \tab User Defined
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm192.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Example Graphics \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Open Sports Body Type Shown
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 For the user defined body it is possible to define the body graphics as a combination of 3d vectors and 3d facets. To edit the user defined body data select the menu option \i Data / Edit User Body Data\'85\plain\fs20  The displayed spread-sheet has two paneled tabs. The first is for 3d vectors, where each vector requires a start point and an end point. The second tab is for 3d facets where each facet can be a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 n\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  noded planar facet. Each node of the facet requires an x, y and z co-ordinate.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 The body data can be populated with one of the standard types to act as a start point. Use the local \i File / Load Standard body Data\plain\fs20  menus to do this.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 Body facet data can also be imported from an external STL file. Scaling and shift options are offered to manipulate the imported STL facets.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 The application is currently restricted to a maximum of 10 noded facets and a total of 2000 facets and 800 vectors.
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D Tyre Data
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The 2D module has some specific requirements for data.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Rolling Radius,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 225 mm)
\par Sets the relevant tyres rolling radius.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Tyre Width,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 150 mm)
\par Sets the relevant tyre width, used to support graphical display only.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Vertical Stiffness,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units N/mm),  (default 400 N/mm)
\par Sets the relevant tyres vertical stiffness, used in the compliance analysis.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Spring Diameter,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 14 mm)
\par \pard Sets the diameter of the graphical spring used to optionally represent the tyre vertical spring.
\par 
\par Other related graphical items such as colour can also be edited through this display.
\par 
\par \pard \b Enhanced Tyre and Spring
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The graphical representation of the tyre and wheel can be extended beyond the default. The user can define a cross section that is then revolved around the spindle axis. These user profiles can thus include much more surface definition than the simple models.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm193.bmp\}
\par Editing the Tyre data set
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D Steering Type
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The 3D steering type is a menu selection rather than a data variable. The menu choices are;
\par 
\par \pard\tx355 \tab Steering Rack
\par \tab Steering Box
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm10.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Setting the Steering type from the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 New\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  menu
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 The steering box option requires additional data hard points to be defined:
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 101:  \tab 1st Point on Box Axis, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 102:  \tab 2nd Point on Box Axis, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 103:  \tab Pitman Joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm194.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Editing the Steering Box Hard Point Data
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D Titles
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The data for the title block is intended for use as a labelling/description mechanism. This optional data block is only accessible via the \i Data / Titles\'85\plain\fs20  menu item.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm195.bmp\}
\par Editing the titles section
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 {\up K}
\b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D Bush Properties
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The Bush Properties data is displayed by hard point and is added to the bottom of the normal points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  position edit box when in compliant mode. A bush has a local co-ordinate system defined relative to the global Cartesian set. The bushes stiffness properties are then defined in this local co-ordinate system.
\par 
\par The individual data fields are:
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point on Bush local Z-Axis, X, Y and Z, Abs,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default none)
\par Sets the position of a point on the local Z-axis for the current hard points bush local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in absolute x, y and z co-ordinates, (\plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 absolute\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  implies relative to global Cartesian origin).
\par \pard \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point on Bush local Z-Axis, X, Y and Z, Rel,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default none)
\par Sets the position of a point on the local Z-axis for the current hard points bush local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in relative x, y and z co-ordinates, (\plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 relative\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  implies relative to selected hard points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  position).
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point on Bush local Z-Axis, Pnt,\plain\fs20   (choice),  (default none)
\par Sets the position of a point on the local Z-axis for the current hard points bush local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is by selecting another hard point in the suspension model. Typical use of this would be in aligning a bush axis along a wishbone axis by pointing towards the second point on the pivot axis.
\par \pard \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point in Bush local X-Z Plane, X, Y and Z, Abs,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default none)
\par Sets the position of a point on the local X-Z plane for the current hard points bush local axes,  (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in absolute x, y and z co-ordinates, (\plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 absolute\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  implies relative to global Cartesian origin).
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point on Bush local X-Z Plane, X, Y and Z, Rel,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default none)
\par \pard Sets the position of a point on the local X-Z plane for the current hard points bush local axes,  (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in relative x, y and z co-ordinates, (\plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 relative\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  implies relative to selected hard points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  position).
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Bush Local Stiffness, X, Y and Z,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units N/mm),  (default 1000 N/mm or 2000 N/mm)
\par Sets the translational stiffness of the current bush in the defined local axes.\b\ul 
\par \pard 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Bush Local Stiffness, X-X, Y-Y and Z-Z,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units N.m/Rad),  (default 0 N.m/Rad)
\par Sets the rotational stiffness of the current bush in the defined local axes.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm196.bmp\}
\par Bush Properties \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Example Complaint Data
\par \pard 
\par The bush edit dialog box attempts to stop invalid bush axes definitions. These normally occur when the z-axis point and the point in the x-y plane are the same or are along the same vector. Typical examples of these occur with the compliant rack models when the z-axis point is aligned relative to the other rack bush but the x-y point has not been changed from the default.
\par 
\par The inclusion of a compliant racks bush also normally requires that the rotational stiffness values are defined for the rack bushes to control the rack rotations.
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D External Force Data
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The External Force data is displayed by \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Set\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . Each set is a collection of forces, each force having a definition in terms of its head and tail positions, attachment part and magnitude. Force head and tail positions are defined in either absolute position or relative to a hard point position.
\par 
\par The individual data fields are:
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Description,\plain\fs20   (string),  (units none),  (default none)
\par Label for the force set.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 End,\plain\fs20   (selection),  (units none),  (default none)
\par \pard Identifies which suspension corner to apply the force too.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Apply to Part,\plain\fs20   (selection),  (units none),  (default none)
\par Identifies which part in the selected corners\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  suspension to apply the force too.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Magnitude,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units N),  (default 0 N)
\par Defines the magnitude of the force.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Force Head, X, Y and Z, Abs,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default none)
\par Sets the position of the force head in the global Cartesian co-ordinate system, co-ordinate system origin taken as global co-orindate system origin.
\par \pard \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Force Head, X, Y and Z, Rel. to Pnt.,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default none)
\par Sets the position of the force head in the global Cartesian co-ordinate system, co-ordiante system origin taken as selected hard point.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Force Tail, X, Y and Z, Abs,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default none)
\par Sets the position of the force tail in the global Cartesian co-ordinate system, co-ordinate system origin taken as global co-orindate system origin.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Force Tail, X, Y and Z, Rel. to Pnt.,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default none)
\par \pard Sets the position of the force tail in the global Cartesian co-ordinate system, co-ordiante system origin taken as selected hard point.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Force Tail, X, Y and Z, Rel. to Head,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default none)
\par Sets the position of the force tail in the global Cartesian co-ordinate system, co-ordiante system origin taken as the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 head\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  of the current force.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm197.bmp\}
\par External Forces Properties \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Example Data
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D Part C of G Properties
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The C of G Properties data is displayed by part. Each part optionally has a point attached to it that is identified as the C of G point. If a template does not have an associated C of G point either an existing point can be flagged as the C of G by editing the template, or a new point can be added to the template via the \i Edit / Add to Model / Part C of Gs\plain\fs20  menu options. A point added to the template in this way is automatically flagged as being a C of G point. C of G points are only visible when in compliant mode and are drawn as a green and black quadrant symbol. An additional set of visibility switches are used for C of G points that control point visibility, axis marker points and axes. Older model files will not have C of G points in them and will need modifying to match the updated templates.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm198.bmp\}
\par C of G Marker Point \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Screen Shot
\par \pard 
\par Part mass properties enable modal frequencies and forced-damped responses to be identified.
\par 
\par The individual data fields are:
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point Label,\plain\fs20   (string),  (default none)
\par Sets a string label for each point.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Kinematic Point Coordinates (Global),\plain\fs20   (real),  (unit mm),  (default none)
\par Lists the current kinematic hard point co-ordinates.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point on C of G local Z-Axis, X, Y and Z, Abs,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default none)
\par Sets the position of a point on the local Z-axis for the current hard points C of G local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in absolute x, y and z co-ordinates, (\plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 absolute\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  implies relative to global Cartesian origin).
\par \pard \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point on C of G local Z-Axis, X, Y and Z, Rel,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default none)
\par Sets the position of a point on the local Z-axis for the current hard points C of G local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in relative x, y and z co-ordinates, (\plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 relative\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  implies relative to selected hard points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  position).
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point on C of G local Z-Axis, Pnt,\plain\fs20   (choice),  (default none)
\par \pard Sets the position of a point on the local Z-axis for the current hard points bush local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is by selecting another hard point in the suspension model. Typical use of this would be in aligning a bush axis along a wishbone axis by pointing towards the second point on the pivot axis.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point in C of G local X-Z Plane, X, Y and Z, Abs,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default none)
\par Sets the position of a point on the local X-Z plane for the current hard points C of G local axes,  (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in absolute x, y and z co-ordinates, (\plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 absolute\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  implies relative to global Cartesian origin).
\par \pard \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point in C of G local X-Z Plane, X, Y and Z, Rel,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default none)
\par Sets the position of a point on the local X-Z plane for the current hard points C of G local axes,  (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in relative x, y and z co-ordinates, (\plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 relative\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  implies relative to selected hard points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  position).
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 C of G Mass,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units Kg),  (default 1.0 Kg)
\par Sets the mass of the part that this point is the C of G marker for.\b\ul 
\par \pard 
\par \plain\b\fs20 C of G Local Inertia, Ixx, Iyy, Izz, Ixy, Ixz and Iyz,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units kg/mm2)
\par Sets the 6 inertia values for the part. Inertia properties are defined about the local axis system that has been defined by the points above.\b\ul 
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm199.bmp\}
\par C of G Properties \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Example Data
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 1: Double Wishbone, Damper to Lower Wishbone
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 1    Double wishbone, damper to lower wishbone.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 1:  \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5:  \tab Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6: \tab Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 11:\tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 12:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 16:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 17:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 18:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 19:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
\par 
\par Point 20:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 21:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 22:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par Point 23:\tab Part 4 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm200.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 1, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm201.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 1, Schematic
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 2: \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'91\f1 H\plain\f0\b\fs28 \'92\f1  Frame Lower, Single Upper Link
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 2    \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'91\f1 H\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1  frame lower, single upper link.
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par Point 1:  \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Lower wishbone outer front pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5:  \tab Lower wishbone outer rear pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6: \tab Upper link inner ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Upper link outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 16:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 17:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 18:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 19:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
\par 
\par Point 20:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 21:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 22:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm202.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 2, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm203.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 2, Schematic
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 3: Steerable Macpherson Strut
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 3    Steerable Macpherson strut.
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par Point 1:  \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6: \tab Strut slider axis point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Strut top point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 11:\tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 12:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 16:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 17:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 18:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 19:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
\par 
\par Point 20:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 21:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 22:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par Point 23:\tab Part 4 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm204.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 3, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm205.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 3, Schematic
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 4: Non-Steerable Macpherson Strut, Twin Lower Link
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 4    Non-Steerable Mac strut, twin lower link.
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par Point 1:  \tab Front lower link inboard, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Rear lower link inboard, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Front lower link outboard, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5:  \tab Rear lower link outboard, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6: \tab Strut slider axis point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Strut top point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 11:\tab Reaction rod outboard point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 12:\tab Reaction rod body point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 16:\tab Spring top centre line, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 17:\tab Spring bottom at centre line, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 18:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 Point 19:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 20:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 21:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 22:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par Point 23:\tab Part 4 C of G
\par Point 24:\tab Part 5 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm206.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 4, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 5: 5-Link Rigid Axle (Panhard Rod)
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 5    5-Link Rigid Axle (Panhard Rod).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par Point 1:  \tab Right lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Right upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Left lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 4:  \tab Left upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5: \tab Right lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Right upper link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab  \tab Left lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Left upper link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Panhard rod body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 10:\tab Panhard rod axle end, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Right spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 12:\tab Right spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 13:\tab Left spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 14:\tab Left spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 15:\tab Centre pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 16:\tab Right wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 17:\tab Left wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 Point 18:\tab Wheel stub axle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 19:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 20:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 21:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par Point 22:\tab Part 4 C of G
\par Point 23:\tab Part 5 C of G
\par Point 24:\tab Part 6 C of G
\par Point 25:\tab Part 7 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm207.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 5, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 6: Double Wishbone, Damper to Upper Wishbone
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 6    Double Wishbone, damper to upper wishbone.
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par Point 1:  \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5:  \tab Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6: \tab Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 11:\tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 12:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 16:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 17:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 18:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 19:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
\par 
\par Point 20:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 21:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 22:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par Point 23:\tab Part 4 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm208.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 6, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm209.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 6, Schematic
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 7: Non-Steerable Macpherson Strut, Toe Link to Wishbone
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 7    Non-Steerable Mac strut, toe link to wishbone.
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par Point 1:  \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6: \tab Strut slider axis point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Strut top point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 11:\tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 12:\tab Steering link to wishbone ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 16:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 17:\tab Lower spring pivot point on lower arm, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 18:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 19:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm210.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 7, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 8: 4-Link Rigid Axle (Panhard Road)
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 8    4-Link Rigid Axle, (Panhard rod).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par Point 1:  \tab Right lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Left lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5:  \tab Right lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6: \tab Left lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Panhard rod body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Panhard rod axle end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Right spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 10:\tab Right spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 11:\tab Left spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 12:\tab Right spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 18:\tab Axle tube \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  stub axle, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 19:\tab Right wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 Point 20:\tab Left wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 21:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 22:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 23:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par Point 24:\tab Part 4 C of G
\par Point 25:\tab Part 5 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm211.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 8, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 9: 4-Link Rigid Axle (Twin Upper)
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 9    4-Link Rigid Axle (Twin Upper)
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par Point 1:  \tab Right lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Right upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Left lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 4:  \tab Right lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5: \tab Right upper link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Left lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Left upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Left upper link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Right spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 10:\tab Right spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Left spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 12:\tab Left spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 18:\tab Axle tube - stub axle, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 19:\tab Right wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 Point 20:\tab Left wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 21:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 22:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 23:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par Point 24:\tab Part 4 C of G
\par Point 25:\tab Part 5 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm212.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 9, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 10: Trailing Arm, Upper and Lower Rear Links
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 10  Trailing arm, upper and lower rear links.
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par Point 1:  \tab Trailing arm front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Lower link inner ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Lower link outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5:  \tab Upper link inner ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab Upper link outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:\tab Damper lower trailing arm end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 16:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 17:\tab Spring lower trailing arm end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 18:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 19:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
\par 
\par Point 20:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 21:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 22:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm213.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 10, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 11: Semi Trailing Arm
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 11  Semi trailing arm.
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par Point 1:  \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Damper lower trailing arm end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 16:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 17:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 18:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 19:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
\par 
\par Point 20:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm214.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 11, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 12: Steerable Twin Parallel Wishbones and Knuckle
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 12  Steerable twin parallel wishbones + knuckle.
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par Point 1:  \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5:  \tab Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6: \tab Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 11:\tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 12:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 16:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 17:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 18:\tab Knuckle centre, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 19:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 20:\tab Knuckle upper axis point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 21:\tab Knuckle lower axis point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 22:\tab Axis point, x,y,z (mm)
\par 
\par Point 23:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 24:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 25:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par Point 26:\tab Part 4 C of G
\par Point 27:\tab Part 5 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm215.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 12, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 14: Double Wishbone, Push Rod to Damper
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 14  Double wishbone, push rod to damper.
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par Point 1:  \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5:  \tab Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6: \tab Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Push rod wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9: \tab Push rod rocker end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 11:\tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 12:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 16:\tab Damper to body point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 17:\tab Damper to rocker point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 18:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 19:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 20:\tab Rocker axis 1st point, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 Point 21:\tab Rocker axis 2nd point, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 22:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 23:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 24:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par Point 25:\tab Part 4 C of G
\par Point 26:\tab Part 5 C of G
\par Point 27:\tab Part 6 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm216.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 14, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 15: Double Wishbone, Rocker Arm Damper
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 15  Double wishbone, rocker arm damper.
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par Point 1:  \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5:  \tab Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6: \tab Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Push rod wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9: \tab Push rod rocker end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 11:\tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 12:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 16:\tab Damper to body point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 17:\tab Damper to rocker point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 18:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 19:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 20:\tab Rocker axis 1st point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 21:\tab Rocker axis 2nd point, x,y,z (mm).
\par 
\par Point 22:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 23:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 24:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par Point 25:\tab Part 4 C of G
\par Point 26:\tab Part 5 C of G
\par Point 27:\tab Part 6 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm217.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 15, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 16: Non-Steerable Lower \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'91\f1 A\plain\f0\b\fs28 \'92\f1  with Toe Link
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 16  Non-Steerable lower \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'91\f1 A\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1  with toe link.
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par Point 1:  \tab Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5:  \tab Front lower link outboard, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6: \tab Lower link inboard ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Rear lower link outboard, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 11:\tab Reaction rod outboard point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 12:\tab Reaction rod body point, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 16:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 17:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 18:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 19:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
\par 
\par Point 20:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 21:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 22:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par Point 23:\tab Part 4 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm218.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 16, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 17:  Double Wishbone, Push Rod Monoshock
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 17  Double wishbone, pushrod monoshock.
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par Point 1:  \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5:  \tab Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6: \tab Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Push rod wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9: \tab Push rod rocker end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 11:\tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 12:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 16:\tab Damper to body point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 17:\tab Damper to rocker point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 18:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 19:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 20:\tab Rocker axis 1st point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 21:\tab Rocker axis 2nd point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 22:\tab 2nd link 1st rocker end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 23:\tab 2nd link damper rocker end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 24:\tab Damper rocker axis 1st point, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 Point 25:\tab Damper rocker axis 2nd point, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 26:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 27:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 28:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par Point 29:\tab Part 4 C of G
\par Point 30:\tab Part 5 C of G
\par Point 31:\tab Part 6 C of G
\par Point 32:\tab Part 7 C of G
\par Point 33:\tab Part 8 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm219.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 17, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 18: Double Wishbone, Upper Toe Link and \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'91\f1 S\plain\f0\b\fs28 \'92\f1  Link
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 18  Double wishbone, upper toe link + \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'91\f1 S\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1  link.
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par Point 1:  \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5:  \tab Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6: \tab Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 11:\tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 12:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 16:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 17:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 18:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 19:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 20:\tab Upper toe link inboard end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 21:\tab Upper toe link outboard end, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 Point 22:\tab Drop link axis point, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 23:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 24:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 25:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par Point 26:\tab Part 4 C of G
\par Point 27:\tab Part 5 C of G
\par Point 28:\tab Part 6 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm220.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 18, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 19: Hinged Trailing Arm, Twin Lower Link
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par 
\par \b Type 19  Hinged Trailing Arm, Twin Lower Link.
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par Point 1:  \tab Lower front link inboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Lower rear link inboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Lower front link outboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5:  \tab Lower rear link outboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6:  \tab Upper link inboard end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Upper link outboard end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Spring/Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Spring/Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 11:\tab Trailing arm hinge upper joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 12:\tab Trailing arm to body, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 18:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 19:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 20:\tab Trailing arm hinge lower pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par 
\par Point 21:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 22:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 23:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par Point 24:\tab Part 4 C of G
\par Point 25:\tab Part 5 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm221.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 19, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 20: Double Wishbone, Twin outer Ball Joints
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par 
\par \b Type 20  Double Wishbone, Twin Outer Ball Joints.
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par Point 1:  \tab Lower wishbone front link inboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Lower wishbone rear link inboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Lower wishbone front link outboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5:  \tab Upper wishbone front link inboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6:  \tab Upper wishbone rear link inboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:  \tab Upper wishbone front link outboard end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:  \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9:  \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:  \tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 12:  \tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 16:  \tab Upper Spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 17:  \tab Lower spring pivot point, (to front lower link), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 18:  \tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 19:  \tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 20:  \tab Lower wishbone rear link outboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 21:  \tab Upper wishbone rear link outboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par 
\par Point 22:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 23:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 24:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par Point 25:\tab Part 4 C of G
\par Point 26:\tab Part 5 C of G
\par Point 27:\tab Part 6 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm222.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 20, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 21: 5-Link Rigid Axle (Watts Linkage)
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 21    5-Link Rigid Axle (Watts Linkage).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par Point 1:  \tab Right lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Right upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Left lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 4:  \tab Left upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5:  \tab Right lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6: \tab Right upper link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Left lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:  \tab Left upper link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9:  \tab Watts cross link 1, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 10:  \tab Watts cross link 2, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Right spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 12:\tab Right spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 13:\tab Left spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 14:\tab Left spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 15:\tab Centre pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 16:\tab Right wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 17:\tab Left wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 18:\tab Wheel stub axle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 19:\tab Watts upper link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 20:\tab Watts upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 21:\tab Watts lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 Point 22:\tab Watts lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 23:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 24:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 25:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par Point 26:\tab Part 4 C of G
\par Point 27:\tab Part 5 C of G
\par Point 28:\tab Part 6 C of G
\par Point 29:\tab Part 7 C of G
\par Point 30:\tab Part 8 C of G
\par Point 31:\tab Part 9 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm223.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 21, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 22: Double Wishbone, Twin Outer Ball Joints, Spring to Front Link
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 22    Double wishbone, twin outer ball joints, spring to front link.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 1:  \tab Lower wishbone front inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Lower wishbone rear inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Lower wishbone front outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 4:  \tab Upper wishbone front inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5: \tab Upper wishbone rear inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Upper wishbone front outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 10:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 11:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 12:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 13:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 14:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 15:\tab Lower wishbone rear outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 16:\tab Upper wishbone rear outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par 
\par Point 17:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 18:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 19:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par Point 20:\tab Part 4 C of G
\par Point 21:\tab Part 5 C of G
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 22:\tab Part 6 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm224.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 22, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 23: Double Wishbone, Twin Outer Ball Joints, Anti-Roll Bar
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 23    Double wishbone, twin outer ball joints, anti-roll bar.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 1:  \tab Lower wishbone front inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Lower wishbone rear inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Lower wishbone front outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5:  \tab Upper wishbone front inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6: \tab Upper wishbone rear inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Upper wishbone front outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 11:\tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 12:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 16:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 17:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 18:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 19:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
\par 
\par Point 20:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 21:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 22:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par Point 23:\tab Part 4 C of G
\par 
\par Point 24:\tab Lower wishbone front inner pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 25:\tab Lower wishbone rear inner pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 26:\tab Lower wishbone front outer ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 27:\tab Upper wishbone front inner pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 28: \tab Upper wishbone rear inner pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 29:\tab Upper wishbone front outer ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 30:\tab Damper wishbone end(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 31: \tab Damper body end(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 32:\tab Outer track rod ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 33:\tab Inner track rod ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 34:\tab Upper spring pivot point(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 35:\tab Lower spring pivot point(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 36:\tab Wheel spindle point(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 37:\tab Wheel centre point(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par 
\par Point 38:\tab Part 1 C of G(2)
\par Point 39:\tab Part 2 C of G(2)
\par Point 40:\tab Part 3 C of G(2)
\par Point 41:\tab Part 4 C of G(2)
\par 
\par Point 42:\tab Roll Bar Attachment 1
\par Point 43:\tab Roll Bar Attachment 2
\par Point 44:\tab Roll Bar to Link 1
\par Point 45:\tab Roll Bar to Link 2
\par Point 46:\tab Roll Bar Mount 1
\par Point 47:\tab Roll Bar Mount 2
\par Point 48:\tab Roll Bar Revolute
\par Point 49:\tab Drop Link 1 C of G
\par Point 50:\tab Drop Link 2 C of G
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 51:\tab Roll Bar 1 C of G
\par Point 52:\tab Roll Bar 2 C of G
\par 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm225.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 23, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 24: Steerable Macpherson Strut, Twin Outer Ball Joints
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 24    Steerable Macpherson strut, twin outer ball joints.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 1:  \tab Lower wishbone inner front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Lower wishbone inner rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Lower wishbone outer front ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 4:  \tab Lower wishbone outer rear ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5: \tab Strut slider upper axis point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Strut top point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Strut slider lower axis point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 10:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 11:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 12:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 13:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
\par 
\par Point 14:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 15:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 16:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par Point 17:\tab Part 4 C of G
\par Point 18:\tab Part 5 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm226.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 24, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 25: Double Wishbone, Twin Lower Outer Ball Joints
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 25    Double wishbone, twin lower outer ball joints.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 1:  \tab Lower wishbone front inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Lower wishbone rear inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Lower wishbone front outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5:  \tab Upper wishbone front inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6: \tab Upper wishbone rear inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 11:\tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 12:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 16:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 17:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 18:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 19:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 20:\tab Lower wishbone rear outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par 
\par Point 21:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 22:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 23:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par Point 24:\tab Part 4 C of G
\par Point 25:\tab Part 5 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm227.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 25, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 26: Double Wishbone, Damper to Lower Wishbone, Compliant Rack
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 26    Double wishbone, damper to lower wishbone, compliant rack.
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 1:  \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5:  \tab Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6: \tab Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 11:\tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 12:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 16:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 17:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 18:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 19:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
\par 
\par Point 20:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 21:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 22:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par Point 23:\tab Part 4 C of G
\par 
\par Point 24:  \tab Lower wishbone front pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 25:  \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 26:  \tab Lower wishbone outer ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 27:  \tab Upper wishbone front pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 28: \tab Upper wishbone rear pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 29:\tab Upper wishbone outer ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 30:\tab Damper wishbone end(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 31: \tab Damper body end(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 32:\tab Outer track rod ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 33:\tab Inner track rod ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 34:\tab Upper spring pivot point(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 35:\tab Lower spring pivot point(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 36:\tab Wheel spindle point(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 37:\tab Wheel centre point(2), x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 
\par Point 38:\tab Part 1 C of G(2)
\par Point 39:\tab Part 2 C of G(2)
\par Point 40:\tab Part 3 C of G(2)
\par Point 41:\tab Part 4 C of G(2)
\par 
\par Point 42:\tab Rack Link P1
\par Point 43:\tab Rack Link P2
\par Point 44:\tab Rack Mount P1
\par Point 45:\tab Rack Mount P2
\par Point 46:\tab Rack Link C of G
\par Point 47:\tab Rack Housing C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm228.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 26, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 27: Steerable Macpherson Strut, Twin Lower Link
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 27    Steerable Mac strut, twin lower link.
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par Point 1:  \tab Front lower link inboard, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Rear lower link inboard, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Front lower link outboard, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 4:  \tab Rear lower link outboard, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5: \tab Strut slider upper axis point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Strut top point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Strut slider lower axis point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Steering arm outboard end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Steering arm inboard end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 10:\tab Spring top centre line, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Spring bottom at centre line, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 12:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 13:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
\par 
\par Point 14:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 15:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 16:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par Point 17:\tab Part 4 C of G
\par Point 18:\tab Part 5 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm229.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 27, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 28: 4-Link Rear, Transverse Control Link
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 28    4-Link Rear, Transverse Control Link.
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par Point 1:  \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Lower wishbone outer front pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 4:  \tab Lower wishbone outer rear pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5:  \tab Upper front link inner ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6: \tab Upper front link outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 10:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 11:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 12:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 13:\tab Upper rear link inner ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 14:\tab Upper rear link outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 Point 15:\tab Drop link to upright, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 16:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 17:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par Point 18:\tab Part 3 C of G
\par Point 19:\tab Part 4 C of G
\par Point 20:\tab Part 5 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm230.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 28, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Type 29: Twist Beam \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Twin Wheel
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Type 29    Twist Beam \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Twin Wheel
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par Point 1:  \tab Trailing arm body point right, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 2:  \tab Trailing arm body point left, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 3:  \tab Shear point right, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 4:  \tab Right damper lower trailing arm end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 5:  \tab Right damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 6: \tab Right upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Right lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Wheel spindle point 1, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Wheel centre point 1, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 10:\tab wheel centre point 2, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Wheel spindle point 2, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 12:\tab Left damper lower trailing arm end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 13:\tab Left damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 14:\tab Left upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 15:\tab Left lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 16:\tab Shear point left, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 17:\tab Twist beam point right, x,y,z (mm).
\par Point 18:\tab Twist beam point left, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 Point 19:\tab Centre connection point, x,y,z (mm).
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 20:\tab Part 1 C of G
\par Point 21:\tab Part 2 C of G
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm231.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 29, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Default Co-ordinates
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D Solver Tolerances
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The 3D Solver uses a number of tolerances to control the calculation process.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Kinematic Solution Tol.,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units none),  (default 1.e-10)
\par Controls the solution tolerance used by the kinematic solver in identifying the convergence limit.
\par The kinematic solver uses a hybrid approach to find a zero of a system of n non-linear functions in n variables by a modification of the Powell hybrid method.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Bump Small Perturbation Size,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 0.05 mm)
\par \pard The standard approach used by the solver to determine certain derivatives at each suspension step position is to use a small incremental bump displacement. The size of this bump perturbation can be changed if necessary to improve solution stability.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Steer Small Perturbation Size,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 0.05 mm)
\par For steerable suspension templates that do not have a identified top and bottom ball joint, the standard approach used by the solver to determine the steering axis at each suspension step position is to use a small incremental steer displacement. The size of this steer perturbation can be changed if necessary to improve solution stability.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm232.bmp\}
\par Solver Tolerances Display
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D General Defaults
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par Control of certain display features relies on a set of user controllable values.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Min Allowable Scale Factor,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units none),  (default 0.00001)
\par Sets the minimum scale factor allowed when zooming or dynamically viewing the graphics display. This stops the viewing pipeline from failing through excessive zooming out.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Max Allowable Scale Factor,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units none),  (default 500)
\par Sets the maximum scale factor allowed when zooming or dynamically viewing the graphics display. This stops the viewing pipeline from failing through excessive zooming in.
\par \pard \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Tolerance on Point Pick,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units none),  (default 0.05)
\par Defines the size of the pick circle used to check if a point has been selected with the mouse. The value is in 2d screen size, where \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 1\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  is the full screen length. A larger number will make the selection easier but increase the chance of mis-selection.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Tolerance on Coincident Point Pick,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units none),  (default 0.02)
\par Defined the screen size value used to determine whether two or more points are considered to be coincident. A greater value will lead to more instances of points being considered coincident. 
\par \pard \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Joggle Step Size,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 10 mm)
\par Sets the step size used for joggle mode editing. This is the coarse step size, (Ctrl + arrow), whilst the fine step size, (Shift + arrow), will be 1/10th of this.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Animation Update,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mSec),  (default 50 mSec)
\par Defines the fastest rate for which animation will update. Machines unable to refresh at this rate will draw at their maximum speed, whilst high specification PC\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s will be clipped to the defined refresh speed. Reducing this value will increase animation frame rate on high end PC\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm233.bmp\}
\par General Defaults Display
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Deformed Geometry Scalar
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The display of the compliant model displacements has a specific scalar display setting.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Deformed Geometry Scalar,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units none),  (default 1.0)
\par To assist in viewing the model deflections due to the compliance effects a scalar value is editable. This is equivalent to the Finite-element modal analysis scalar value. Note that this controls both the static display and the animation when in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 compliant\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  mode.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm234.bmp\}
\par Setting the complaint graphics deformed geometry scalar
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Deformed Geometry Position
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The animation display of the compliant model occurs at a defined incremental position.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Deformed Geometry Position,\plain\fs20   (integer),  (units none),  (default 0)
\par The animation of compliant deformed geometry is drawn at a defined position. The default setting for this is to animate it at the static position, (0). The deformed geometry at alternative incremental steps can be performed by changing this value. This value is internally clipped to the maximum number of steps available.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm235.bmp\}
\par Setting the complaint graphics deformed geometry position
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Enhanced Graphic Sizes
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The Enhanced graphics elements have a number of dimensional properties that can be defined by the user.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Spring Diameter,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 45 mm)
\par The graphical diameter of the suspension spring is drawn to this diameter.\b\ul 
\par 
\par \plain\b\fs20 No of Spring Coils (max 60),\plain\fs20   (integer),  (units mm),  (default 10)
\par Sets the No. of coils used when drawing the suspension spring.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Lower Damper Tube Diameter,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 25 mm)
\par \pard Sets the diameter for the lower tube of the damper enhanced graphics element.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Upper Damper Tube Diameter,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 30 mm)
\par Sets the diameter for the upper tube of the damper enhanced graphics element.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Damper Number of Facets (max 19),\plain\fs20   (integer),  (units mm),  (default 10)
\par The detail of the cylinder used to draw a damper element is controlled by a number of facets.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Pivot Diameter,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 10 mm)
\par \pard Defines the diameter of the cylinder used to graphically illustrate model parts that have been identified as pivot axes.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Pivot No. of Facets (max 19),\plain\fs20   (integer),  (units mm),  (default 8)
\par The detail of the cylinder used to draw a pivot is controlled by a number of facets.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Tyre No of Facets (max 31),\plain\fs20   (integer),  (units mm),  (default 21)
\par The detail of the facetted tyre representation is controlled by this value.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Tyre Diameter Shoulder (0-1),\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 0.9)
\par \pard Sets the value for the diameter of the tyre shoulder as a fraction of the rolling radius. The shoulder is the tapered section of the graphical representation.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Tyre Width Shoulder (0-1),\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 0.75 mm)
\par Sets the value for the width of the tyre excluding the shoulder as a fraction of the width. The shoulder is the tapered section of the graphical representation.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 3D Tracking Line Length,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 150 mm)
\par \pard Sets the length of the tracking line drawn through each hard point when in edit mode.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Joggle Symbol Size,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units none),  (default 0.05)
\par Defines the size of the joggle symbol used to indicate the current point when in joggle mode. Size is based on screen size.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 C of G Symbol Size,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 25 mm)
\par Defines the diameter of the symbol used to represent the position of the C of G symbol.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Grid Size,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 200 mm)
\par \pard Sets the size of the squares used to draw the ground plane grid.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm236.bmp\}
\par Editing the Enhanced graphics sizes
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Graphics Label Sizes
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The text labels drawn on the graphics display can be set by the user.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point Value Size,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 20 mm)
\par Sets the size of the text used to identify the model template point Nos.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point No. Size,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 20 mm)
\par Sets the size of the text used to identify the model hard point co-ordinates.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm237.bmp\}
\par Editing the Enhanced graphics label sizes
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Compliance Graphic Sizes
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The Compliance graphics elements have a number of dimensional properties that can be defined by the user.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Ball Joint Diameter,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 15 mm)
\par Defines the diameter of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Rigid\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  ball joints in the compliant model.\b\ul 
\par 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Ball Joint Circumferential Complexity,\plain\fs20   (integer),  (units none),  (default 10)
\par Sets the number of facets applied to the ball joint in the circumferential direction.\b\ul 
\par 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Ball Joint Height Complexity,\plain\fs20   (integer),  (units none),  (default 10)
\par \pard Sets the number of facets applied to the ball joint in the height direction.\b\ul 
\par 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Bush Radius,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 12 mm)
\par Defines the radius of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Bush\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  elements in the complaint model.\b\ul 
\par 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Bush Length,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 30 mm)
\par Defines the length of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Bush\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  elements in the compliant model.\b\ul 
\par 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Bush Circumferential Complexity,\plain\fs20   (integer),  (units none),  (default 10)
\par Sets the number of facets applied to the bush in the circumferential direction.\b\ul 
\par \pard 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Bush Height Complexity,\plain\fs20   (integer),  (units none),  (default 4)
\par Sets the number of facets applied to the bush in the height direction.\b\ul 
\par 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Bush Axis Length,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 60 mm)
\par Defines the length of the lines used to indicate the bush local axes.\b\ul 
\par 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Tyre Spring Diameter,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 12 mm)
\par Defines the diameter of the springs for the compliant tyre element.\b\ul 
\par 
\par \plain\b\fs20 External Force Head,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 30 mm)
\par \pard Defines the size of the external force head.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 External Force Fixed Length,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 200 mm)
\par Defines the length of the external force arrow, when force display is set to fixed length.\b\ul 
\par 
\par \plain\b\fs20 External/Internal Force Scaled Length,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm/N),  (default 0.2 mm/N)
\par Defines the scale factor applied to forces when force display is set to variable length.\b\ul 
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm238.bmp\}
\par Editing the Compliance graphics sizes
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Graph Markers and Text Sizes
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The user can define the graph marker sizes. Additionally the text sizes on the graphs and the compliance results can be set by the user.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Data Marker Size,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units screen size 0-1),  (default 0.05)
\par Defines the size of the marker symbols for the graph Data lines
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Scope Marker Size,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units screen size 0-1),  (default 0.05)
\par Defines the size of the marker symbols for the graph Scope lines
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 User Marker Size,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units screen size 0-1),  (default 0.05)
\par \pard Defines the size of the marker symbols for the graph User lines
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Graph Data Values Text Size,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units screen size 0-1),  (default 0.03)
\par Defines the size of the text used to display values of points on the graphs.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Compliance Title Text Size,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units screen size 0-1),  (default 0.1)
\par Defines the size of the text used to display the graph titles on the compliance coefficient results display.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Compliance Label Text Size,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units screen size 0-1),  (default 0.067)
\par \pard Defines the size of the text used to display the variables labels on the compliance coefficient results display.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Compliance Values Text Size,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units screen size 0-1),  (default 0.067)
\par Defines the size of the text used to display the compliance coefficients on the bar chart results display.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm239.bmp\}
\par Editing the Graph marker and text sizes
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Graphs Decimal Points Display
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The user can define the number of decimal points used on the graph display for individual value displays.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 X-Data Listing,\plain\fs20   (integer),  (units none),  (default 3)
\par Sets the number of decimal points for the X data value list.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Y-Data Listing,\plain\fs20   (integer),  (units none),  (default 3)
\par Sets the number of decimal points for the Y data value list.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Derivative Data Listing,\plain\fs20   (integer),  (units none),  (default 3)
\par Sets the number of decimal points for the derivative value on the data list.
\par \pard \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Scope Deviation,\plain\fs20   (integer),  (units none),  (default 3)
\par Sets the number of decimal points for the display of the deviation between the data and scope lines.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 User Deviation,\plain\fs20   (integer),  (units none),  (default 3)
\par Sets the number of decimal points for the display of the deviation between the data and user lines.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 X-Axis Label,\plain\fs20   (integer),  (units none),  (default 3)
\par Sets the number of decimal points for the displayed X-Axis value labels.
\par \pard \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Y-Axis Label,\plain\fs20   (integer),  (units none),  (default 3)
\par Sets the number of decimal points for the displayed Y-Axis value labels.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Compliance Graph Values,\plain\fs20   (integer),  (units none),  (default 3)
\par Sets the number of decimal points for the displayed bar chart values on the compliance graphs.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm240.bmp\}
\par Editing the displayed Graph Decimal Points settings
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D Point Tolerances
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par Individual point tolerances can be edited by locating the point and tolerance of interest through the tree structure presented and setting the actual limiting value. All point tolerances can be set in one go by defining the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 delta\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  from their current position in each axis and direction.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\fs20 For the individual point tolerances setting, select from tree structure and then edit from;
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm241.bmp\}
\par Selecting the Point and tolerance to Edit from the tree display
\par \pard \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Min X,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default none)
\par Sets the minimum allowed hard point value in the X-axis direction.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Max X,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default none)
\par Sets the maximum allowed hard point value in the X-axis direction.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Min Y,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default none)
\par Sets the minimum allowed hard point value in the Y-axis direction.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Max Y,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default none)
\par Sets the maximum allowed hard point value in the Y-axis direction.
\par \pard \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Min Z,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default none)
\par Sets the minimum allowed hard point value in the Z-axis direction.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\b\fs20 Max Z,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default none)
\par Sets the maximum allowed hard point value in the Z-axis direction.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm242.bmp\}
\par Individual Point Tolerance Editing
\par \pard 
\par For the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 all points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  tolerances setting, all tolerances are edited as positive difference values along each axis direction, (i.e. both positive and negative axis directions are entered as positive values;
\par 
\par \b -ve X Tolerance,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 25 mm)
\par Sets the tolerance in the \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 ve X-axis direction for the hard point value.
\par 
\par \b +ve X Tolerance,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 25 mm)
\par Sets the tolerance in the +ve X-axis direction for the hard point value.
\par \pard 
\par \b -ve Y Tolerance,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 25 mm)
\par Sets the tolerance in the \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 ve Y-axis direction for the hard point value.
\par 
\par \b +ve Y Tolerance,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 25 mm)
\par Sets the tolerance in the +ve Y-axis direction for the hard point value.
\par 
\par \b -ve Z Tolerance,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 25 mm)
\par Sets the tolerance in the \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 ve Z-axis direction for the hard point value.
\par 
\par \b +ve Z Tolerance,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 25 mm)
\par \pard Sets the tolerance in the +ve Z-axis direction for the hard point value.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm243.bmp\}
\par Editing \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 All\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  point Tolerances
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D Spring Data
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The suspension spring properties are used to define the spring forces applied to the compliant model, (when enabled). Incremental spring force properties are set by the combination of rate, free length, fitted length and the current spring displacement. Note that only linear rate springs can currently be modeled. All the properties are repeated twice (1) and (2) to support either corner models with two springs or full axle templates.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\fs20 To edit the spring properties select \i Data / Compliance Data / Spring Properties\'85\plain\fs20 
\par \pard 
\par \b Front Spring Rate,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units N/mm),  (default 41.5 N/mm)
\par Sets the linear spring rate for the front suspension spring.
\par 
\par \b Rear Spring Rate,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units N/mm),  (default 41.5 N/mm)
\par Sets the linear spring rate for the rear suspension spring.
\par 
\par \b Front Spring Free Length,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 300 mm)
\par Sets the free (un-compresed) length for the front suspension spring.
\par 
\par \b Rear Spring Free Length,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 300 mm)
\par \pard Sets the free (un-compresed) length for the rear suspension spring.
\par 
\par \b Front Spring Fitted Length,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 246.5 mm)
\par Sets the fitted (installed) length for the front suspension spring.
\par 
\par \b Rear Spring Fitted Length,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units mm),  (default 246.5 mm)
\par Sets the fitted (installed) length for the rear suspension spring.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm244.bmp\}
\par Editing the 3D Spring Data
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 {\up K}
{\up K}
\b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D Damper Data
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The suspension damper properties are used to define the damping characteristics applied to the compliant model, (when enabled) via the main dampers. The damping due to bushes is included separately via a Bush Loss Angle number that can be edited via the \i Data / Compliance Data / General Data\'85\plain\fs20  menu option. Note that only linear damping can currently be modeled.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\fs20 To edit the damper properties select \i Data / Compliance Data / Damper Properties\'85\plain\fs20 
\par 
\par \b Front Damper 1 Rate,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units N/mm),  (default 0.4 N.s/mm)
\par \pard Sets the damper rate for the front suspension damper 1 element.
\par 
\par \b Rear Damper 1 Rate,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units N/mm),  (default 0.4 N.s/mm)
\par Sets the damper rate for the rear suspension damper 1 element.
\par 
\par \b Front Damper 2 Rate,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units N/mm),  (default 0.4 N.s/mm)
\par Sets the damper rate for the front suspension damper 2 element.
\par 
\par \b Rear Damper 2 Rate,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units N/mm),  (default 0.4 N.s/mm)
\par Sets the damper rate for the rear suspension damper 2 element.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm245.bmp\}
\par Editing the 3D Damper Data
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D Roll Bar Properties
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The suspension roll bar properties are used to define the roll stiffness of the roll bar revolute joint, when included in a template. It only affects compliance results.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\fs20 To edit the roll bar properties select \i Data / Compliance Data / Roll Bar Properties\'85\plain\fs20 
\par 
\par \b Front Roll Bar Rate,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units N.mm/deg),  (default 2.0E6 N.mm/deg)
\par Sets the roll bar rate for the front suspension roll bar element.
\par 
\par \b Rear Roll Bar Rate,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units N.mm/deg),  (default 2.0E6 N.mm/deg)
\par \pard Sets the roll bar rate for the rear suspension roll bar element.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm246.bmp\}
\par Editing the 3D Roll Bar Properties
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D General Compliance Data
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The compliant solver uses a number of standard constants in solving the compliant suspension model. These constants can be modified by the user through the data section.
\par \b\ul 
\par \plain\fs20 To edit th ese general compliance properties select \i Data / Compliance Data / General Data\'85\plain\fs20 
\par 
\par \b Singularity Stiffness,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units N/mm),  (default 10. N/mm)
\par Defines the stiffness value used within the solver to remove the singularity caused by components such as tie rods. Eliminates the degree of freedom using this arbitrary stiffness value.
\par \pard 
\par \b Rigid (Ball Joint) Stiffness,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units N/mm),  (default 1.0e8 N/mm)
\par For ball joints defined as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 rigid\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  the compliant solver will treat as high stiffness bushes with a constant 3x translational stiffness and 3x zero rotational stiffness. This is the value used for the high translational stiffness.
\par 
\par \b Rigid Rotation Stiffness,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units N.mm/deg),  (default 1.0e8 N.mm/deg)
\par For joints defined as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 rotational\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  the compliant solver will treat as a a 6 d.o.f. bush with a constant 3x high translational stiffness and 2x high rotational stiffness. This is the value used for the high rotational stiffness. The translational stiffness is taken as the value above.
\par \pard 
\par \b Bush Loss Angle,\plain\fs20   (real),  (units deg),  (default 3.0 deg)
\par Defines the default damping value for a bush. User defined values for individual bushes will overwrite this setting.
\par  
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm247.bmp\}
\par Editing the 3D General Compliance Data
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D User Definable Templates
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \pard \b Template Properties
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par Each of the template types hard coded into Shark uses a series of properties to identify its form. The properties include;
\par 
\par \pard\tx355 \tab Template Number
\par \tab Template Label
\par \tab No of Parts
\par \tab Part Labels
\par \tab No of Points
\par \tab Point Labels/Point Number
\par \tab Point default x, y and z values
\par \tab No of Bushes
\par \tab Point attachments to parts
\par \tab Point Types
\par \tab No of Graphical Elements
\par \tab Graphical element type
\par \tab Graphical element associated points
\par \pard\tx355 \b\ul 
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20 Together with some additional properties this allows the application to both build, display and analyze the kinematic and compliant models for each template.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b Hard Coded Templates
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\tx355 By default some 28 templates are hard coded into the application. These are the ones listed in this help file under the \uldb 3D suspension templates\plain\fs20  section. It is important to notice that these hard coded templates have a template index number. This allows the data files to refer to a template type by its index number when loaded, using the model structure as defined by the internal template, just replacing the default x, y and z co-ordinates with those in the model file.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b Adding to the Templates
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\tx355 It is possible to add to, (or indeed replace), the standard hard coded templates in two ways. The first is termed as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 default\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  templates, which are automatically loaded on program start-up. Whilst the second is termed \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 user\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  templates and need to be loaded directly by the user once the application is open. Both \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 default\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 user\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  templates are stored in ASCII text files that could be edited/viewed through any standard text editor.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b Default Templates
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\tx355 The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 default\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  templates are loaded on program start-up from the file \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 _User_Templates.Dat\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . This file is searched for in the applications start-up folder, (normally C:\'5clesoft), and if found is read in. As with the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 hard coded\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  templates each entry in the default templates file has a template index number, and the default templates properties will be stored at this location. Thus if the index number used clashes with one used by the hard coded templates the hard coded template data will be over written. Whilst this would normally not be recommended it may for example be useful just to change the default point co-ordinates for the hard coded template.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b Restoring the Default Templates
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\tx355 The default templates would normally only be loaded on program start-up. It is possible to change the default templates through some external text editor such that you want to re-apply the default templates during a program run. This may also be required is a user defined template has inadvertently over-written a default template index and you require to re-read the default templates. To do this without having to quit the application select \i File / Re-Read Default Templates\plain\fs20 .
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b Loading User Defined Custom Templates
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\tx355 User defined templates are stored in ASCII text files having exactly the same file format as the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 defaults\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  file. As with the hard coded and default templates each entry in a file will have a template index number. This will be the template slot that will be filled with the following template properties. So as with user templates it is possible to over-write a hard coded or default template when reading in user template data. To load user defined templates from an existing file select \i File / Add Custom Templates\plain\fs20  and locate the required file via the browser.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b Creating and Editing Templates
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\tx355 The easiest way of modifying and creating templates is to use the supplied template editing tool. This spread sheet based display allows you to view/modify existing templates or create new ones. To open the template editor select \i File / Edit Templates\'85\plain\fs20 
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm248.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Editing the 3D Template Properties \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Parts Panel
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 The display is divided into 4 separate panels, For Parts, Points, Settings and Graphics. As the labels suggest. 
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 The Parts panel identifies how many parts their are in the template and gives each one a label. An additional part is assumed without it needing to be defined, that is the ground/body.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 The Points panel defines how many points there are in the template, gives each one a label and a set of default co-ordinates.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 The Settings panel defines how the model is connected. This is done by identifying which parts a point is attached too. If it is attached to two parts (including ground), this implies a connection between these two parts at the defined point. If a point is only attached to one point then it does not define a joint. Additionally the settings panel identify points that have a special function, (listed as gen type). Examples of these special functions damper attachment points, steering rack attachment etc. A point may have more than one special function, (listed under gen. type 1 and gen. type 2).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 The graphics panel defines any additional graphical elements that the user requires to visualize the suspension template. A number of different graphic element types are available. By default graphical elements are automatically added for the wheel, stub axle, spring and damper and thus do not need to be added by the user.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b Data types, Compulsory, Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\tx355 Template properties are arranged in sets that are identified by colour.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 Compulsory properties, (pale pink), are those that must be defined by the user these include all part and point panel properties together with 4 columns of the settings panel.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 The other property sets are arranged into three levels, all of which can be filled automatically, but with decreasing levels of confidence. The automatic fill can be enabled and set to the required level via the \i Data / Auto Fill\plain\fs20  menu options. By default the Auto fill option is set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 Level 1, (pale mauve), involves identifying and numbering each of the bushes in the template. Setting the auto fill to level 1 or higher fill automatically populate the relevant column and value entry. This auto fill level is the most reliable and can be used with confidence.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 Level 2, (pale green), involves identifying the solution type to be used with each point, column 2 of the settings panel. The combination of general type settings and part connections is used to identify the most suitable solution type from the 10 alternatives. Whilst this level of auto fill works for all the hard coded template types it may need some user intervention for new types, but should be used as a first fill.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 Level 3, (pale yellow), covers the specific settings for each points solution, columns 6 to 11 for the settings panel. Where relevant it identifies which other points are used in each points solution. Some solution types require no points whilst some will require as many as six, (see the later discussion on this). This auto-fill level is the most likely to need user intervention to set the required properties.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b Testing the Template
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\tx355 The settings panel properties are used by the solver to identify the number of unknowns, (i.e. solving for one hard point introduces three unknowns x, y and z), and the equations to use for solving these unknowns. Thus for a successful template settings it is required to have as many equations as unknowns. A utility is provide to pre-test the template properties to check for satisfying this criteria. To test the currently displayed template settings select the menu item \i Data / Run Validation Test\plain\fs20 . A scrollable text display is listed identifying the current unknowns versus equations status and the form of each equation. (See later section for discussion on solution types).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm249.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Testing the 3D Template Settings
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b Settings Panel \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  General Types
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\tx355 One of the compulsory properties for each point is the General type setting. As stated previously a point may have more than one general type settings. General types are listed in columns 12 and 13. Not all of the general types need appear in every template, although some general types must appear in each. These \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 required\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  general types are identified below.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355  The fifteen general types are;
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 0 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  None:\plain\fs20  Defines the point status as having no general type. Examples of this would be most suspension link attachment points to the body and track rod outer ball joints.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 1 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Wheel Centre:\plain\fs20  Simple general type that tags the model point used for the wheel centre. Together with the general type 2 below identify the wheel spindle axis. (Required).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 2 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Stub Axle:\plain\fs20  Simple general type that tags the model point used to identify the wheel spindle axis. See also type 1 above. (Required).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 3 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Steering Attachment Point:\plain\fs20  Identifies which suspension link end point should be used for the steering input from the rack or steering box. The omission of a type 3 point indicates a non-steerable suspension template, and thus will only appear in the rear suspension templates list. This point should be the inboard end of the track rod, i.e. link point connected to body. (Optional).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 4 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Damper 1 to Suspension:\plain\fs20  Identifies this point as being the attachment of the damper to the suspension system it also identifies the slider of a Macpherson strut. If this general type is not identified no damper travel and damper ratios will be determined. Examples of this general type include the lower point of a conventional damper and the point used to identify the slider of a Macpherson strut. (Optional except for strut suspensions).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 5 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Damper 1 to Body (also Strut top):\plain\fs20  Identifies this point as being the upper attachment point of the damper to the body it also identifies the top of a Macpherson strut . If this general type is not identified no damper travel and damper ratios will be determined. Examples of this general type include the upper point of a conventional damper and the point used to identify the top mount of the Macpherson strut. (Optional except for strut suspensions).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 6 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Spring 1 to Suspension: \plain\fs20 Identifies the attachment point of the spring to the suspension. In the case of a conventional coil-over spring damper this point may be the same as type 4 above. If omitted the spring travel and spring ratio parameters will not be calculated. This point would not normally be at a connection between two parts point. (Optional).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 7 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Spring 1 to Body:\plain\fs20  Identifies the attachment point of the spring to the body. In the case of a conventional coil-over spring damper this point may be the same as type 5 above. If omitted the spring travel and spring ratio parameters will not be calculated. (Optional).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 8 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Upper Ball joint:\plain\fs20  Identifies a point as being the upper ball joint for the steering axis. This must be a connection between two parts to conform with the concept of a steering axis. It is an optional setting in that if it (and the lower ball joint) are not defined the steering axis is determined via a small perturbation of the steering input mechanism. If it can be defined it will lead to faster solution times than the small perturbation method. (Optional).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 9 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Lower Ball Joint:\plain\fs20  Identifies a point as being the lower ball joint for the steering axis. This must be a connection between two parts to conform with the concept of a steering axis. It is an optional setting in that if it (and the upper ball joint) are not defined the steering axis is determined via a small perturbation of the steering input mechanism. If it can be defined it will lead to faster solution times than the small perturbation method. (Optional).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 10 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Strut Slider Point:\plain\fs20  Sets the point for a Macpherson strut suspension type that is considered to be the location of the top bush for the strut, (attached to the strut body). (Required for Struts).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 11 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Strut Lower end Point:\plain\fs20  Sets the point for a Macpherson strut suspension type that is considered to be the location of the strut lower bush, (attached to the strut slider). (Required for Struts).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 12 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Roll Bar, Bar Attachment: \plain\fs20 Identifies the location of the roll bar to drop link connection point. (Optional).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 13 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Roll Bar Axis Point:\plain\fs20  Identifies a point as being on the cross car axis of a roll bars attachment to the body. (Optional).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 14 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Roll Bar, Link Attachment:\plain\fs20  Identifies the point as being the first connection between the roll bar drop link and the suspension. (Optional). Roll bars can only be added to full axle templates so a template must have both this and point 32 defined.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 15 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Rack Lateral Mount Point:\plain\fs20  Identifies the point as being the connection between the rack and the body at which the lateral load is taken. Only required if compliant rack force is required on asymmetric loading. (Optional). 
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 16 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Rack Mount Point:\plain\fs20  Identifies the point as being the connection between the second rack connection point to the body. (Optional). 
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 17 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Wheel Centre (2):\plain\fs20  Identifies the point as being a second wheel centre. Typically this implies a rigid axle type of suspension template as it is normal to model independent suspension as individual corners. (Optional). 
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 18 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Damper 2 to Suspension:\plain\fs20  Identifies the point as being the connection between the second damper and the suspension. It could be the left hand side damper in a rigid axle template or the second damper in a two damper corner model, (Optional). 
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 19 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Damper 2 to Body:\plain\fs20  Identifies the point as being the connection between the second damper and the suspension. (Optional). 
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 20 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Spring 2 to Suspension:\plain\fs20  Identifies the point as being the connection between the second spring and the suspension. It could be the left hand side spring in a rigid axle template or the second spring in a twin spring corner model, (Optional). 
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 21 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Spring 2 to Body:\plain\fs20  Identifies the point as being the connection between the second spring and the suspension. (Optional). 
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 22 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Rigid Axle Revolute:\plain\fs20  Defines the point as being the revolute joint required by the over constrained rigid axle templates in kinematic mode. It adds a rotational degree of freedom to allow roll motion to occur kinematically. This rotation is then removed by applying equal and opposite torque\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s in complaint mode as pre-loads of a stiff bush. (Optional). 
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 23 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Stub Axle (2):\plain\fs20  Identifies a second stub axle point used in twist beam type templates where both sides are modelled in one go but have different stub axle references.. (Optional). 
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 24 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Shear Point:\plain\fs20  Used just for twist beam suspensions to identify the different pivot point position used in bump and roll. (Optional).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 25 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Part C of G Point:\plain\fs20  Used to identify a point as being the C of G point for its primary part. It is normal for this point to not be used except as the C of G point, i.e. no involved in any joints. (Optional).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 26 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Upper Ball joint(2):\plain\fs20  Identifies a point as being the upper ball joint for the steering axis on full axle templates only. This must be a connection between two parts to conform with the concept of a steering axis. It is an optional setting in that if it (and the lower ball joint) are not defined the steering axis is determined via a small perturbation of the steering input mechanism. If it can be defined it will lead to faster solution times than the small perturbation method. (Optional).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 27 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Lower Ball Joint(2):\plain\fs20  Identifies a point as being the lower ball joint for the steering axis on full axle templates only. This must be a connection between two parts to conform with the concept of a steering axis. It is an optional setting in that if it (and the upper ball joint) are not defined the steering axis is determined via a small perturbation of the steering input mechanism. If it can be defined it will lead to faster solution times than the small perturbation method. (Optional).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 28 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Strut Slider Point(2)\plain\fs20  Sets the point for a Macpherson strut suspension type that is considered to be the location of the top bush for the strut for full axle templates only, (attached to the strut body). (Required for Struts).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 29 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Strut Lower end Point(2):\plain\fs20  Sets the point for a Macpherson strut suspension type that is considered to be the location of the strut lower bush for full axle templates only, (attached to the strut slider). (Required for Struts).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 32 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Roll Bar, Link Attachment(2):\plain\fs20  Identifies the point as being the second connection between the roll bar drop link and the suspension. (Optional). Roll bars can only be added to full axle templates so a template must have both this and point 14 defined.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 33 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Steering Attachment Point(2):\plain\fs20  Identifies which suspension link end point should be used for the steering input from the rack or steering box for the second end in a full axle model only. See also point 3 above. This point should be the inboard end of the track rod, i.e. link point connected to body or rack. (Optional). For a compliant rack to be added to the model this point must be defined together with point 3 above.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 34 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Roll Bar, Revolute Joint:\plain\fs20  Identifies the point as being the centre point of a two part roll bar. In kinematic mode this is treated as a simple revolute allowing roll motion. In compliant mode the roll bar stiffness is applied to this point to simulate the effect of the roll bar stiffness. (Optional). Roll bars can only be added to full axle templates so a template must have this point and points 14 and 32 defined.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm250.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Template Settings \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Type 1 General types
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b Settings Panel \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Point Types
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\tx355 Point types can be auto filled with a reasonable level of confidence with auto fill set to level 2. The possible nine types are described below to enable direct user editing of this template setting. The equivalent required data values for columns 6 to 11 are also described.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 0 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  To Body/Ground:\plain\fs20  No unknowns or equation added to the main solver for this point type. No column 6 to 11 data required. Solver will pre calculate the positions of these points based on either incremental body bump or roll displacement. Example points would be any suspension attachment to body points.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 1 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Solve Direct (Sphere): \plain\fs20 Adds three unknowns to the solver. Uses the spherical distance relationship of this point to any others listed in columns 6 to 11. Examples of this would be the outer ball joint of a conventional wishbone. Columns 6, 7 and 8 refer to other relevant points on part 1, whilst columns 9, 10 and 11 refer to other relevant points on part 2. As an example a lower wishbone outer ball joint would have two spherical equations with its two inboard body attachment points on its first part, and two spherical  equations with the upper wishbones outer ball joint and the track rod outer ball joint on its second part.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 2 - Solve Post (Vector Pos):\plain\fs20  Does not add any unknowns or equations to the main solver for this point type. It is solved after the main solver calculation is complete and uses three other points on the same body to identify its new position. This would normally be used for points such as a springs\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  attachment to a wishbone. The two pivot points and the outer ball joint define its position. Values need to be defined in columns 6, 7,and 8. No values would be expected in columns 9, 10 and 11.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 3 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Define Z-pos (Wheel Centre):\plain\fs20  This type is only applicable to the wheel centre point. Solution for the wheel centre is based on a defined z position of the tyre contact point. The two unknowns of x and y are added to the solution. Requires three points to be defined in columns 6, 7 and 8 that identify three other points on part 1, (excluding the stub axle point).
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 4 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Solve Direct (Slider Conn):\plain\fs20  Specific point type for strut sliders. Equation based on retaining the relationship between the three strut axis points. Requires the strut top and strut lower point to be defined in columns 6 and 7 for the first part. Requires two points to be defined in columns 9 and 10 for points on part 2.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 5 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Solve Post (Stub Axle): \plain\fs20 Specific point type for stub axle point. Solve method is based on a post main solver calculation that uses three other points on part 1 to define its position. Normally the wheel centre is given as one of the three.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 6 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Solve direct (Slider Bottom):\plain\fs20  Specific type for the strut slider lower axis point. Requires the strut top point to be defined in column 6 for part 1.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 7 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Solve via Hookes Joint:\plain\fs20  Normally only required if a simple spherical solution can\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t be used because a force or connection is applied to a simple link element (i.e. two main suspension connections). An example of this is the mounting of a spring or anti-roll bar to a simple tie rod. The two main connection points are required in columns 6 and 7 for part 1.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 8 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Solve Post (Sphere):\plain\fs20  A post main solver spherical calculation. Requires three defining points to be given in columns 6, 7 and 8 for part 1. Example is solution of roll bar drop link to roll bar position. Can only be applied to points that have no control over kinematic wheel position.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 9 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Pre-Solve (Kine Fix):\plain\fs20  A pre main solver option calculation. Requires no defining points since the point is assumed to be inactive in kinematic mode. It remains fixed to the part it is defined on (normally ground or a ground fixed part). It is used to add additional compliance effects for parts such as rack mounts and sub frames that are assumed to have no kinematic effect but are included in the compliance matrix.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm251.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Template Settings \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  Selecting Point Type
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b Solution Types
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\tx355 The solution types used by the main solver are based on one of six types. The particular type used for each depends on the point type settings discussed above.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 A brief description of each solution type is given here:
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 1 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Sphere Equation:\plain\fs20  Spherical distance between point 1 and point 2.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 2 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Distance to Vector: \plain\fs20 Perpendicular distance of point 1 from a vector drawn from point 2 to point 3.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 3 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  x-x Based Slope: \plain\fs20 The slope between point 1 and point 2 is constant in x-x, i.e. point 1 and two are on the same vector.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 4 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  y-y Based Slope: \plain\fs20 The slope between point 1 and point 2 is constant in y-y, i.e. point 1 and two are on the same vector.\b 
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 5 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  z-z Based Slope: \plain\fs20 The slope between point 1 and point 2 is constant in z-z, i.e. point 1 and two are on the same vector.\b 
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 6 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1  Minimum Z value: \plain\fs20 The lowest point of solid disc at point 1 normal to an axis to point 2 has a lowest z value as defined.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b Creating a New Template
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\tx355 The sequence of data entry for creating a new template should be:
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 \b 1)\plain\fs20  Identify an empty index No.
\par \pard\tx355 \b 2)\plain\fs20  On the \plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 Parts\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  panel enter the template label.
\par \pard\tx355 \b 3)\plain\fs20  On the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Parts\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  panel define the number of parts, (make upright \ul last\plain\fs20  part).
\par \pard\tx355 \b 4)\plain\fs20  On the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Parts\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  panel enter the part labels. Ensure the upright is the last part in the list.
\par \pard\tx355 \b 5)\plain\fs20  Change to the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  panel and define the number of points.
\par \pard\tx355 \b 6)\plain\fs20  On the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  panel define the point labels.
\par \pard\tx355 \b 7)\plain\fs20  On the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  panel enter the default x, y and z coordinates.
\par \pard\tx355 \b 8)\plain\fs20  Change to the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Settings\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  panel and set the Part 1 and Part 2 properties for each point.
\par \pard\tx355 \b 9)\plain\fs20  On the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Settings\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  panel define the relevant Gen. Type 1and Gen. Type 2 settings.
\par \pard\tx355 \b 10)\plain\fs20  Set the Auto fit level to 3 and review the filled values.
\par \pard\tx355 \b 11)\plain\fs20  Check the validity of the auto-filled values using the \i Data / Run Validation Test\'85\plain\fs20  option.
\par \pard\tx355 \b 12)\plain\fs20  If necessary make modifications to columns 6 to 11 to pass test.
\par \pard\tx355 \b 13)\plain\fs20  Change to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Graphics\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  panel and add define number of graphical elements.
\par \pard\tx355 \b 14)\plain\fs20  On the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Graphics\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  panel enter graphical element data.
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Results Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Introduction
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par This section describes the results variables listed by individual section. For details see sub sections;
\par 
\par \pard\fi715 2D Results
\par 3D Suspension Derivatives File
\par 3D Points Listing
\par 3D Compliance Coefficients
\par 3D Bush Deflections
\par 3D Joint/Bush Rotations 
\par 3D Bush Forces
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Results Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  2D Results
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The 2D results are a reduced set of the 3D derivatives list. The 2D results are normally only viewed through the graphs.
\par 
\par The 2D suspension calculated derivatives for bump/rebound articulations are;
\par 
\par \pard\fi715 1) Camber Angle
\par 2) Roll Centre Height
\par 3) Track Change
\par \pard 
\par Whilst for 2D roll articulation the calculated derivatives are;
\par 
\par \pard\fi715 1) Camber Angle
\par 2) Roll Centre Height
\par 3) Roll Centre Lateral
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm252.bmp\}
\par Typical 2D Results plot
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Results Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D Suspension Derivatives File
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The Suspension Derivatives Files (SDF) contains a complete textual listing of the suspension model hard points, calculated static ride values and suspension derivatives varying with each articulation type.
\par 
\par For a definition of each suspension derivative see the Theory section.
\par 
\par The SDF file contains:
\par 
\par Listing of input Suspension Hard Points:
\par 
\par \pard\tx355 \tab Listing depends on suspension type
\par 
\par Static Values:
\par 
\par \tab \cf1 Camber angle (deg):\plain\fs20  Static wheel camber angle
\par \tab \cf1 Toe Angle (SAE) (deg)\plain\fs20 : Static toe angle, (+ve toe in)
\par \tab \cf1 Toe Angle (Plane of Wheel) (deg):\plain\fs20  Static toe angle, (+ve toe in)
\par \tab \cf1 Castor Angle (deg):\plain\fs20  Static Castor angle.
\par \tab \cf1 Castor Trail (Hub Trail) (mm):\plain\fs20  Static Castor trail.
\par \tab \cf1 Castor Offset (mm):\plain\fs20  Static Castor offset
\par \tab \cf1 Kingpin Angle (deg):\plain\fs20  Static Kingpin angle.
\par \pard\tx355 \tab \cf1 Kingpin Offset (at wheel) (mm):\plain\fs20  Static Kingpin offset at the wheel centre.
\par \tab \cf1 Kingpin Offset (at ground) (mm):\plain\fs20  Static kingpin offset at the ground plane.
\par \tab \cf1 Mechanical Trail (mm):\plain\fs20  Static Mechanical trail.
\par \tab \cf1 Roll Centre Height (mm):\plain\fs20  Static Roll Centre Height
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 Derivatives listed for Bump and Rebound Travel:
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 \cf1 Camber angle (deg)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Toe Angle (deg)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Castor Angle (deg)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Kingpin angle (deg)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Damper Ratio
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Spring Ratio
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Anti Dive (%)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Anti Squat (%)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Roll Centre Height to Body (mm)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Roll Centre Height to Ground (mm)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Half Track Change (mm)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Wheelbase change (mm)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Damper Travel (mm)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Spring Travel (mm)\plain\fs20 
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 Derivatives listed for Roll Articulation:
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 \cf1 Camber angle (deg)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Toe Angle (deg)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Castor Angle (deg)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Kingpin angle (deg)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Damper Ratio
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Spring Ratio
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Roll Centre Position X (mm)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Roll Centre Position Y (mm)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Roll Centre Position Z (mm)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Half Track Change (mm)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Wheelbase change (mm)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Damper Travel (mm)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Spring Travel (mm)\plain\fs20 
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\tx355 Derivatives listed for Steer Articulation:
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 \cf1 Toe Angle (inner) (deg)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Toe Angle (outer) (deg)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Camber angle (inner) (deg)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Camber Angle (outer) (deg)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Ackermann (%)
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Turning Circle Radius (mm)\plain\fs20 
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm253.bmp\}
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Sample Section of the Suspension Derivative File (SDF) listing
\par \pard\tx355 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Results Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D Points Listing
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The suspension hard points can be listed at any user-defined combination of bump and steering travel.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm254.bmp\}
\par Setting the Articulation Position for Points Listing
\par \pard 
\par The point listing display is different depending whether the solver is currently in kinematic or compliant mode. In kinematic mode the Hard point co-ordinates are listed for each hard point for both left and right hand wheels of each axle. Values listed are the X, Y and Z co-ordinates in the global co-ordinate system.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm255.bmp\}
\par Kinematic Point Listing
\par \pard 
\par In the compliant mode the Kinematic hard point listing is supplemented at each increment by the inclusion of the compliant hard point positions of each part at the joint. The difference between the kinematic hard point and each compliant parts position at the joint is also listed.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm256.bmp\}
\par Compliant Point Listing
\par \pard 
\par All dimensions and deflections are listed in the global Cartesian co-ordinates system, with units of mm.
\par 
\par In addition to points being listed at a user-defined position two other options are available. These are list the co-ordinates of all the points for a selected corner and current calculation position, or list the co-ordinates of a selected single point for all the current calculation positions.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm257.bmp\}
\par Point Listing for Single Point at All Positions - bump travel shown
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Results Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D Compliance Coefficients
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The 3D compliance coefficients display summarizes the compliant performance of the suspension under a number of defined force sets. Each load case is represented by a series of Vertical bars, each bar being a user selected suspension derivative. The height of the bar is referred to as compliance co-efficient. The displayed co-efficient is the difference between kinematic model and the compliant model, for the selected suspension parameter.
\par 
\par The sign reflects the direction of the change in the suspension parameter, i.e. a co-efficient of \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 0.1 for camber indicates that the camber angle has an increase in negative camber of 0.1 due to the bush compliances under this external load set.
\par \pard 
\par Compliance co-efficients are calculated for the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 ride\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  condition only, (tip, to view at an alternative position, use the Set Ride Height function).
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm258.bmp\}
\par Example 3D Compliance Coefficients Display
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Results Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D Bush Deflections
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The 3D bush deflections listing is only available for compliant models. Calculated deflections are listed for each bushed suspension hard point at each articulation increment and for each articulation type. The bush deflections are listed for the currently displayed external force set and suspension spring setting. Only hard point that are \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 bushed\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  will appear in the list. The deflection is the difference between the kinematic position and the compliant position. Note the sign of the deflections is a function of which part is considered to move relative to what. If in doubt check the deformed geometry plot to identify relative sign.
\par \pard 
\par Points are listed labeled by template point No.
\par 
\par Results Given are;
\par 
\par \cf1 DX Global, (N):\plain\fs20  Lists the bush deflection component in the global X-axis.
\par 
\par \cf1 DY Global, (N):\plain\fs20  Lists the bush deflection component in the global Y-axis.
\par 
\par \cf1 DZ Global, (N):\plain\fs20  Lists the bush deflection component in the global Z-axis.
\par 
\par \cf1 DX Local, (N):\plain\fs20  Lists the bush deflection component in the local X-axis.
\par 
\par \cf1 DY Local, (N):\plain\fs20  Lists the bush deflection component in the local Y-axis.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 DZ Local, (N):\plain\fs20  Lists the bush deflection component in the local Z-axis.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm259.bmp\}
\par Example 3D Bush Deflections Listing
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Results Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D Joint/Bush Rotations
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The 3D joint/bush rotations listing is only available for compliant models. Calculated rotations are listed for each suspension hard point at each articulation increment and for each articulation type. The bush rotations are the kinematic values that are used to determine bush pre-loads when included. The extra rotations due to compliance are not listed.
\par 
\par Points are listed labeled by template point No.
\par 
\par Results Given are;
\par 
\par \cf1 DX Global, (N):\plain\fs20  Lists the joint/bush rotation component in the global X-axis.
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 DY Global, (N):\plain\fs20  Lists the joint/bush rotation component in the global Y-axis.
\par 
\par \cf1 DZ Global, (N):\plain\fs20  Lists the joint/bush rotation component in the global Z-axis.
\par 
\par \cf1 DX Local, (N):\plain\fs20  Lists the joint/bush rotation component in the local X-axis.
\par 
\par \cf1 DY Local, (N):\plain\fs20  Lists the joint/bush rotation component in the local Y-axis.
\par 
\par \cf1 DZ Local, (N):\plain\fs20  Lists the joint/bush rotation component in the local Z-axis.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm260.bmp\}
\par Example 3D Joint/Bush Rotations Listing
\par \pard 
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Results Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  3D Bush Forces
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The 3D bush forces listing is only available for compliant models. Calculated forces are listed for each suspension hard point at each articulation increment and for each articulation type. The bush forces are listed for the currently displayed external force set and suspension spring setting. Each hard point is listed irrespective of whether set as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 rigid\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 bushed\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
\par 
\par Points are listed labeled by template point No.
\par 
\par Results Given are;
\par \pard 
\par \cf1 FX Global, (N):\plain\fs20  Lists the bush force component in the global X-axis.
\par 
\par \cf1 FY Global, (N):\plain\fs20  Lists the bush force component in the global Y-axis.
\par 
\par \cf1 FZ Global, (N):\plain\fs20  Lists the bush force component in the global Z-axis.
\par 
\par \cf1 FX Local, (N):\plain\fs20  Lists the bush force component in the local X-axis.
\par 
\par \cf1 FY Local, (N):\plain\fs20  Lists the bush force component in the local Y-axis.
\par 
\par \cf1 FZ Local, (N):\plain\fs20  Lists the bush force component in the local Z-axis.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm261.bmp\}
\par Example 3D Bush Forces Listing
\par \page
{\up +}
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Results Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  AVI File Writer
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par The graphics display animation sequences can be saved to a file. Currently only AVI format is supported, and without compression. A number of options are presented to make creating AVI files a simple task. Files can be created based on a the current motion sequence, i.e. bump, roll, steering or combined, or via a sequence of user selected images.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm262.bmp\}
\par AVI File Writer Dialogue Box
\par \pard 
\par The top portion of the display identifies whether the AVI file is to be created from the 'Current Motion Sequence' or from a series of 'Stills'. If using the Current motion sequence option, simply select the 'Write File' option to identify the file name/location to save the AVI file too. The AVI file is then generated.
\par 
\par To create an AVI from a sequence of stills set the option to 'create from stills' then select the 'start' button. This will enable the 'Grab' button and zero the 'frames' counter. You can now set the required graphics view and then 'grab' it. Repeat this process until you have grabbed all required frames and then select 'End' to indicate the end of the grab sequence and enable the 'Save File\'85' option. Notice that grabbed images can be viewed as an editable list for a limited amount sorting, editing and deletion prior to writing the file.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm263.bmp\}
\par Editing the 'Grabbed' Stills list
\par \pard 
\par Within the stills list display users can view individual frames for editing. The application used to do this is identified in the 'BMP use' option at the bottom of the main AVI file writer dialogue.
\par 
\par Both the AVI sequence writer option and the stills grabber option can be either for the complete graphics screen or a selected area. The screen area is defined via clip rectangle the settings for which can either be entered directly or picked via the mouse. A switch is provided to optionally show the clip region on the graphics screen.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm264.bmp\}
\par Screen Clip Area Selected
\par \pard 
\par By default the AVI file will include a single copy of the sequence. The user can change the number of cycles that are written to the AVI file. In the case of a user picked sequence of stills they would be repeated n cycle times. The replay rate of the AVI file is set by default to replay at a rate of 10 frames/sec. The user can change this setting prior to creating the file.
\par 
\par A second file write option is provided principally for user grabbed sequences to append the grabbed stills but in reverse order to the AVI file. This then provides a smooth animation sequence from start to end and back to start again when looping through, without having to pick a full sequence.
\par \pard 
\par The AVI file can be viewed automatically after writing by having the 'Open AVI in viewer after Write/Save' option checked. The AVI will be viewed using the application identified in the Windows registry as being the default AVI file viewer. This can be specified directly by the user through 'AVI Use'; setting.
\par \page
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Theory \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1  Definition of Suspension Derivatives
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \pard \b Introduction  
\par \pard \plain\f0\fs20 
\par \f1 A large number of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 suspension derivatives\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  are calculated by \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 SHARK\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , some are given at the static ride height only, whilst the variation with articulation is determined for others. The definition of these derivatives is given in this section and are based upon the SAE standard \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Vehicle Dynamics Terminology\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1  SAE J670e. Where variations from this standard exist or where specific Lotus standards have been applied these will be identified. The units used together with the sign convention are also stated. The calculation formulae are given in terms of both the Shark co-ordinate system and point numbering system.
\par \pard 
\par \pard \b Static Values
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Camber Angle, (deg)\plain\fs20 
\par The inclination of the wheel plane to the vertical. It is considered positive when the wheel leans outward at the top and negative when it leans inward.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm265.bmp\}
\par Camber Angle Definition
\par \pard 
\par \b Toe Angle, SAE, (deg)
\par \plain\fs20 The static toe angle of a wheel at a specified wheel load or relative position of the wheel centre with respect to the sprung mass, is the angle between a longitudinal axis of the vehicle and the line of intersection of the wheel plane and the road surface. The wheel is \plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 toed-in\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1  if the forward portion of the wheel is turned towards a central longitudinal axis of the vehicle (+ve), and \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 toed-out\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1  if turned away, (-ve).
\par \pard 
\par \b Toe Angle, Plane of Wheel, (deg)\plain\fs20 
\par This derivative is a Lotus definition which has the same units and sign convention as the SAE term, but instead of using the intersection of the wheel plane to the ground as the toe line, the angle is measured in the plane of the wheel.
\par 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm266.bmp\}
\par Toe Angle Definitions
\par \pard 
\par \b Castor Angle, (deg)
\par \plain\fs20 The angle in side elevation between the steering axis and the vertical. It is considered positive when the steering axis is inclined rearward (in the upward direction), and negative when the steering axis is inclined forward.
\par 
\par \b Castor Trail, hub trail, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The horizontal distance in side elevation between the steering axis  and the wheel centre. The offset is considered positive when the steering axis is forward of the wheel centre and negative when it is rearward.\b 
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Castor Offset, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The distance in side elevation between the point where the steering axis intersects the ground, and the centre of tyre contact. The offset is considered positive when the intersection point is forward of the tyre contact centre and negative when it is rearward.\b 
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm267.bmp\}
\par Castor Angle and Offset Definitions
\par \pard 
\par \b Kingpin Angle, (deg)
\par \plain\fs20 The angle in front elevation between the steering axis and the vertical. It is considered positive when the steering axis leans inwards at the top and negative when it leans out.
\par 
\par \b Kingpin offset, at wheel, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 Kingpin offset at the wheel centre is the horizontal distance in front elevation from the wheel centre to the steering axis. It is considered positive when the wheel centre is outboard of the steering axis, (normal case), and negative if inboard.\b 
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Kingpin offset, at ground, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 Kingpin offset at the ground is the horizontal distance in front elevation between the point where the steering axis intersects the ground and the centre of the tyre contact. It is considered positive when the tyre contact is outboard of the steering axis intersection and negative if inboard.
\par 
\par \b Mechanical Trail, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The perpendicular distance in side elevation between the steering axis and the centre of tyre contact. It is considered positive when the steering axis is forward of the tyre contact centre and negative when it is rearward.
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm268.bmp\}
\par Kingpin Angle and Offset Definitions
\par \pard 
\par \b Roll Centre Height, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The point in the transverse vertical plane through any pair of wheel centres at which lateral forces may be applied to the sprung mass without producing suspension roll. The preceding is the SAE definition, and is more normally stated as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 the instantaneous centre of rotation of the body\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . At static for a symmetrical suspension this point lies on the vehicle centreline and thus only the roll centre height is quoted at static. The calculation procedure uses a small bump step to define the tyre contact patch path, and allows a perpendicular plane to be constructed to this path at the current contact point. The intersection of this plane with either the other sides plane, (roll), or the vehicle centre line, (bump) defines the roll centre position.\b 
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm269.bmp\}
\par Roll Centre Height Definition
\par \pard 
\par \pard \b\cf2 Incremental Values, (Included in SDF formatted file)
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Camber Angle, (deg)\plain\fs20\cf2 
\par \plain\fs20 The inclination of the wheel plane to the vertical. It is considered positive when the wheel leans outward at the top and negative when it leans inward.
\par 
\par \b Toe Angle, SAE, (deg)
\par \plain\fs20 The static toe angle of a wheel at a specified wheel load or relative position of the wheel centre with respect to the sprung mass, is the angle between a longitudinal axis of the vehicle and the line of intersection of the wheel plane and the road surface. The wheel is \plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 toed-in\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1  if the forward portion of the wheel is turned towards a central longitudinal axis of the vehicle (+ve), and \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 toed-out\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1  if turned away, (-ve).
\par \pard 
\par \b Toe Angle, Plane of Wheel, (deg)\plain\fs20 
\par This derivative is a Lotus definition which has the same units and sign convention as the SAE term, but instead of using the intersection of the wheel plane to the ground as the toe line, the angle is measured in the plane of the wheel.
\par 
\par \b Castor Angle, (deg)
\par \plain\fs20 The angle in side elevation between the steering axis and the vertical. It is considered positive when the steering axis is inclined rearward (in the upward direction), and negative when the steering axis is inclined forward.
\par \pard 
\par \b Kingpin Angle, (deg)
\par \plain\fs20 The angle in front elevation between the steering axis and the vertical. It is considered positive when the steering axis leans inwards at the top and negative when it leans out.
\par 
\par \b Damper Ratio
\par \plain\fs20 The ratio of change in the vertical height of the tyre contact centre and the change in length of the damper. It has no sign convention and would be greater than one when the change in vertical height of the wheel is more than the change in length of the damper. (Lotus definition).
\par \pard 
\par \b Spring Ratio
\par \plain\fs20 The ratio of change in the vertical height of the tyre contact centre and the change in length of the spring. It has no sign convention and would be greater than one when the change in vertical height of the wheel is more than the change in length of the spring. (Lotus definition).
\par 
\par \b Anti Dive, (%)
\par \plain\fs20 The ratio, given as a percentage, of the amount of the weight transfer under breaking that is reacted by the suspension geometry in resisting the body pitching motion. Thus 100% anti-dive results in no theoretical body pitching under braking. The construction technique relies on the suspension side view instantaneous centre being found and then further construction using brake split and vehicle c of g height. (Lotus Definition). Side view instantaneous centres (I.C.) are determined using small perturbation and projecting a normal to the path of the tyre contact point. Note that the origin point changes depending whether braking is inboard or outboard.\b 
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm270.bmp\}
\par % Anti-Dive Derivation
\par \pard \b 
\par Anti Squat, (%)
\par \plain\fs20 The ratio, given as a percentage, of the amount of the weight transfer under acceleration that is reacted by the suspension geometry in resisting the body pitching motion. Thus 100% anti-squat results in no theoretical body pitching under acceleration. The construction technique relies on the suspension side view instantaneous centre being found and then further construction using torque split and vehicle c of g height.. (Lotus Definition). Side view instantaneous centres (I.C.) are determined using small perturbation and projecting a normal to the path of the tyre contact point. The value is only applicable to axles with some portion of the drive load. Note that the origin position changes depending on whether the suspension is independent or not.\b 
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm271.bmp\}
\par % Anti-Squat Derivation \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1  4WD
\par \pard 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm272.bmp\}
\par % Anti-Squat Derivation - FWD
\par \pard \b 
\par Roll Centre Height to Body, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The point in the transverse vertical plane through any pair of wheel centres at which lateral forces may be applied to the sprung mass without producing suspension roll. The preceding is the SAE definition, and is more normally stated as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 the instantaneous centre of rotation of the body\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . At static for a symmetrical suspension this point lies on the vehicle centreline and thus only the roll centre height is quoted at static. This is the variation of the roll centre height with wheel bump/rebound articulation, relative to the body origin. (Lotus definition).\b 
\par \pard 
\par Roll Centre Height to Ground, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 See full description above. This is the variation of the roll centre height with wheel bump/rebound articulation, relative to the ground origin. (Lotus definition).\b 
\par 
\par Half Track Change, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The change in cross car co-ordinates from the static condition of the tyre contact centre. It is considered positive when the change is an increase the track and negative for a decrease in track. (Lotus definition).
\par \b 
\par Wheelbase Change, (mm)
\par \pard \plain\fs20 The change in fore/aft car co-ordinates from the static condition of the tyre contact centre. It is considered positive when the change is an increase in the wheelbase and negative for a decrease in wheelbase. (Lotus definition).\b 
\par 
\par Damper Travel, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The change in distance from the static condition between the two points defining the damper attachment points. It is considered positive when the change is such as to increase the distance between them and negative when it decreases. (Lotus definition).\b 
\par \pard 
\par Spring Travel, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The change in distance from the static condition between the two points defining the spring attachment points. It is considered positive when the change is such as to increase the distance between them and negative when it decreases. (Lotus definition).\b 
\par 
\par Roll Centre Position, X, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental X co-ordinate of the roll centre under roll articulation. (Lotus Definition)\b 
\par 
\par Roll Centre Position, Y, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental Y co-ordinate of the roll centre under roll articulation, normally given the wheel centre value. (Lotus Definition)\b 
\par \pard 
\par Roll Centre Position, Z, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental Z co-ordinate of the roll centre under roll articulation. (Lotus Definition)\b 
\par 
\par Ackermann, (%)
\par \plain\fs20 The ratio, given as a percentage, of the actual steer angles compared to those required for zero scrub. (Lotus Definition)\b 
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm273.bmp\}
\par % Ackermann Definition
\par \pard 
\par \pard \b\cf2 Additional Incremental Values, (Available on Graphs or SDF splines file)
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Castor Trail,  (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The horizontal distance in side elevation between the steering axis  and the wheel centre. The offset is considered positive when the steering axis is forward of the wheel centre and negative when it is rearward.\b 
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b Castor Offset, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The distance in side elevation between the point where the steering axis intersects the ground, and the centre of tyre contact. The offset is considered positive when the intersection point is forward of the tyre contact centre and negative when it is rearward.\b 
\par \pard \plain\fs20 
\par \b Kingpin offset, at wheel centre, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 Kingpin offset at the wheel centre is the horizontal distance in front elevation from the wheel centre to the steering axis. It is considered positive when the wheel centre is outboard of the steering axis, (normal case), and negative if inboard.\b 
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \b Kingpin offset, at ground, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 Kingpin offset at the ground is the horizontal distance in front elevation between the point where the steering axis intersects the ground and the centre of the tyre contact. It is considered positive when the tyre contact is outboard of the steering axis intersection and negative if inboard.
\par \pard 
\par \b Mechanical Trail, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The perpendicular distance in side elevation between the steering axis and the centre of tyre contact. It is considered positive when the steering axis is forward of the tyre contact centre and negative when it is rearward.
\par \b 
\par TCP Position, X, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental X co-ordinate of the tyre contact point.\b 
\par 
\par TCP Position, Y, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental Y co-ordinate of the tyre contact point.\b 
\par 
\par TCP Position, Z, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental Z co-ordinate of the tyre contact point.\b 
\par \pard 
\par Hub Position, X, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental X co-ordinate of the wheel centre point.\b 
\par 
\par Hub Position, Y, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental Y co-ordinate of the wheel centre point.\b 
\par 
\par Hub Position, Z, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental Z co-ordinate of the wheel centre point.\b 
\par 
\par Tyre Vertical Force, (N)
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental value of the vertical force at the tyre contact point. Only given in compliant mode.\b 
\par 
\par Swing Arm Length \{\-Front\'7d, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental length of the front view virtual swing arm.\b 
\par \pard 
\par Swing Arm Centre Y \{\-Front\'7d, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental Y position of the front view virtual swing arm centre.\b 
\par 
\par Swing Arm Centre Z \{\-Front\'7d, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental Z position of the front view virtual swing arm centre.\b 
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm274.bmp\}
\par Front View Swing Arm Definitions
\par \pard \b 
\par Swing Arm Length \{\-Side\'7d, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental length of the side view virtual swing arm.\b 
\par 
\par Swing Arm Centre X \{\-Side\'7d, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental X position of the side view virtual swing arm centre.\b 
\par 
\par Swing Arm Centre Z \{\-Side\'7d, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental Z position of the side view virtual swing arm centre.\b 
\par 
\par Roll Centre Height to Body, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The point in the transverse vertical plane through any pair of wheel centres at which lateral forces may be applied to the sprung mass without producing suspension roll. The preceding is the SAE definition, and is more normally stated as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 the instantaneous centre of rotation of the body\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . At static for a symmetrical suspension this point lies on the vehicle centreline and thus only the roll centre height is quoted at static. This is the variation of the roll centre height with wheel bump/rebound articulation, relative to the body origin. (Lotus definition).\b 
\par \pard 
\par Roll Centre Height to Ground, (mm)
\par \plain\fs20 See full description above. This is the variation of the roll centre height with wheel bump/rebound articulation, relative to the ground origin. (Lotus definition).\b 
\par 
\par TCP dx/dz Gradient, (mm/mm)
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental value for the gradient of the Tyre contact point when viewed from the side.\b 
\par \plain\fs20 
\par \page
{\up $}
{\up #}
{\up >}
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 {\up K}
{\up K}
\b\fs28 LOTUS ENGINEERING\plain\fs28 
\par \pard\qc \b\fs20 
\par \{bmc bm275.bmp\}
\par \{bmc bm276.bmp\}
\par \{bmc bm277.bmp\}
\par \pard 
\par \page
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \fs28 
\par \page
}